VOLUME 3 OF 3 FOR Volume 3.pdf · CSI Form 1.5C - Substitution Request (During the Bidding Phase). CSI Form 13.1A - Substitution Request (After the Bidding Phase). Section 01 6400

PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 3 OF 3 FOR

Boynton Wil l iams & Associates900 36 t h Ave NW l Su i te 100

Norman, OK 73072

P 405.329.0423F 405.364.1439

bwaarchitects.com

Member: American Institute of Architects

NEW ELEMENTARY AND HIGH SCHOOL BUILDING MOUNTAIN VIEW-GOTEBO PUBLIC SCHOOLS 150 SOUTH FIRST ST. MOUNTAIN VIEW, OKLAHOMA 73062 DIVISIONS 21 THROUGH 28

Mechanical Engineering Specifications Electrical Engineering Specifications

DIVISIONS 31 THROUGH 33

Site Work Specifications

CONSTRUCTION MANAGER Fenix Constructors, Inc. 215 Drew St.. Ardmore, Ok 73128 Phone: 580.223.4313 Fax: 580.223.4315

CIVIL ENGINEER Grubbs Consulting, LLC 1819 South Morgan Rd. Oklahoma City, Ok 73128 Phone: 405.265.0641 Fax: 405.265.0649 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER AR Structural, PLLC 1209 Mandeville Dr. Murphy, TX 75094 Phone: 214.395.9705

GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER Burgess Engineering & Testing 2603 N. Shields Blvd. Moore, OK 73160 Phone: 405.790.0487 Fax: 405.790.0788 MEP ENGINEER PSA Consulting 3031 NW 64th, Suite 101 Oklahoma City, OK 73116 Phone: 405.840.1901 Fax: 405.840.1916

Issue Date

August 10, 2015 Project Number

N14023

PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 3 OF 3 FOR


Norman, OK 73072

P 405.329.0423F 405.364.1439

bwaarchitects.com


NEW ELEMENTARY AND HIGH SCHOOL BUILDING MOUNTAIN VIEW-GOTEBO PUBLIC SCHOOLS 150 SOUTH FIRST ST. MOUNTAIN VIEW, OKLAHOMA 73062 © Copyright 2015 by Boynton Williams & Associates. All Rights Reserved. Drawings and Project Manual are the Property of Boynton Williams & Associates. No part of these Drawings and Project Manual or information depicted may be copied or used without the express written permission of Boynton Williams & Associates. Possession of a copy of these Drawings and Project Manual does not confer any rights in the copyrights or other rights contained in these Drawings and Project Manual. Issue Date

August 10, 2015 Project Number

N14023

00 0103 - 1 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OKProject No. N14023 MSTR 0914 PROJECT INFORMATION

DOCUMENT 00 0103 BWA N14023 PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT NAME: NEW ELEMENTARY AND HIGH SCHOOL OWNER: BOARD OF EDUCATION, ISD #38I003

MOUNTAIN VIEW - GOTEBO PUBLIC SCHOOLS MOUNTAIN VIEW, KIOWA COUNTY, OKLAHOMA

PROJECT LOCATION: 150 SOUTH 1ST STREET MOUNTAIN VIEW, OKLAHOMA

ARCHITECT: BOYNTON WILLIAMS & ASSOCIATES, INC. 900 36TH AVENUE NW, SUITE 100 NORMAN, OKLAHOMA 73072 Phone 405-329-0423 Fax 405-364-1439 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER: FENIX CONSTRUCTORS INC.

215 DREW S. W. ARDMORE, OKLAHOMA 73401 Phone: 580.223.4313 Fax: 580.223.4315

PRINCIPAL-IN-CHARGE: CLARENCE C. WILLIAMS III, AIA ASSOCIATE ARCHITECT- V. TOM RATANASIN, AIA IN-CHARGE: [email protected] PROJECT MANAGER: ALISON ACKER [email protected] ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NUMBER: N14023 NOTE: Please transmit all project correspondence either written, telephone, fax or E-mail through the

Project Manager.

END OF DOCUMENT

00 0110 - 1 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OKProject No. N14023 MSTR 0415 TABLE OF CONTENTS

DOCUMENT 00 0110 BWA N14023 TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME ONE DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION Document 00 0101 Project Title Page Document 00 0103 Project Information Document 00 0110 Table of Contents Document 00 0115 List of Drawings

PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

00 1200 Solicitation for Bids 00 1500 Instructions to Bidders 00 1510 Special Conditions 00 2100 Allowances 00 2300 Alternates

BIDDING DOCUMENTS

00 2000 Bid Form 00 2100 Bid Security 00 2200 Bid Affidavits 00 2250 Contractors Checklist for Bid Submittal

BID PACKAGE SUMMARIES 00 3000 Description of Bid Packages GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 7213 AIA General Conditions CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FORMS Exhibit “A” Sample Certificate of Insurance Exhibit “B” Letter of Credit Forms Exhibit “C” Minimum Project Safety Standards Acknowledgement Form Exhibit “D” Tax Exemption Letter Exhibit “E” Claim and Invoice Affidavit Exhibit “F” Felony and Sex Offenders Affidavit Exhibit “G” Contract Affidavit Exhibit “H” Tobacco‐Free Affidavit Exhibit “I” Drug‐Free Affidavit


Exhibit “J” Non‐Kickback Statement Exhibit “K” Asbestos Free Certification Exhibit “L” Application for Payment Forms Exhibit “M” Request for Information Form

Exhibit “N” Sample Fenix Subcontract Exhibit “P” Sample Fenix Purchase Order Exhibit “Q” Critical Path Schedule Exhibit “R” Notice to Proceed Form Exhibit “S” Drawings & Bid Package Notes

END OF VOLUME ONE DOCUMENT

VOLUME TWO INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION Document 00 0101 Project Title Page Document 00 0103 Project Information Document 00 0110 Table of Contents

CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CONSTRUCTION PRODUCTS AND ACTIVITIES DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 1100 Summary Section 01 2100 Allowances CSI Form 2.4A - 1994 Section 01 2200 Unit Prices Section 01 2300 Alternates Section 01 2600 Contract Modification Procedures

CSI Form 13.6A “Change Order Request” CSI Form 13.6D “Proposal Worksheet Summary” CSI Form 13.6C “Proposal Worksheet Detail”

Section 01 2613 Requests for Interpretation CSI Form 13.2A “Request For Interpretation” CSI Form 13.2B “Request for interpretation log”

Section 01 2900 Payment Procedures Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims and Release Of Liens Non-Kickback Statement Document G702 - Application and Certification for Payment form. Document G703 - Continuation Sheet form for AIA Document G702. CSI Form 2.5A - Stored Material Summary.

Section 01 2973 Schedule of Values Document G703 - Schedule of Values Sample Form Section 01 3100 Project Management and Coordination Section 01 3119 Project Meetings Section 01 3216 Construction Progress Schedule Section 01 3217 Network Analysis Schedule Section 01 3300 Submittal Procedures AIA Document G810 - Transmittal Letter.


CSI Form 12.1B - Submittal Log. CSI Form 12.2A - Submittal Checklist. Section 01 3516 Alteration Project Procedures Section 01 3546 Indoor Air Quality Procedures Section 01 4200 References Section 01 4500 Quality Control Section 01 4523 Testing and Inspection Services Section 01 4525 Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Services Section 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 5100 Temporary Utilities Section 01 5213 Field Offices and Sheds Section 01 5800 Project Identification Drawing Section 01 6200 Product Options CSI Form 1.5A - - Subcontractors and Major Material Suppliers List Section 01 6211 Asbestos Prohibition for Public Works Projects - Schools & Public work

Federal Asbestos "Statement" Alternative to Inspection Federal Subcontractors or Material Suppliers Certification of

Compliance With Asbestos Restrictions Federal General Contractors Certification of Compliance with

Asbestos Restrictions Section 01 6213 Product Substitution Procedures

CSI Form 1.5C - Substitution Request (During the Bidding Phase). CSI Form 13.1A - Substitution Request (After the Bidding Phase).

Section 01 6400 Owner Furnished Products Section 01 7123 Field Engineering Section 01 7300 Execution Section 01 7329 Cutting and Patching Section 01 7700 Closeout Procedures

AIA Document G706 “Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims”

AIA Document G706A “Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens” AIA Document G707 “Consent of Surety to Final Payment”

Section 01 7800 Closeout Submittals DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 02 4113 Site Demolition Section 02 4119 Selective Demolition DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE Section 03 0586 Vapor Barrier Product Detail ASTM E 1643 Section 03 1100 Concrete Forming Section 03 2000 Concrete Reinforcement Section 03 3000 Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03 3500 Concrete Finishing Section 03 3900 Concrete Curing Section 03 4816 Pre-cast Concrete Splash Blocks


DIVISION 4 - MASONRY Section 04 2111 Brick Veneer Section 04 2200 Concrete Masonry Units Section 04 2204 Masonry Veneer Section 04 2206 CMU Masonry Screen Walls Section 04 4200 Exterior Stone Cladding DIVISION 5 – METALS Section 05 1200 Structural Steel Section 05 2100 Steel Joist Framing Section 05 3100 Steel Deck Section 05 5000 Metal Fabrications Section 05 5134 Fixed Access Ladder Section 05 5135 Fixed Ships Ladder Section 05 5213 Pipe and Tube Railings DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTIC AND COMPOSITES Section 06 0575 Fire Retardant Treatment of Wood Section 06 1000 Rough Carpentry - Metal Section 06 1513 Wood Floor Decking Section 06 4102 Custom Architectural Wood Casework Section 06 6113 Cultured Marble Fabrications - Generic schools DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 0156 Retrofit Metal Roofing System Section 07 1900 Water Repellants Section 07 2113 Board Insulation Section 07 2116 Blanket Insulation Section 07 2400 Exterior Insulation and Finish System Section 07 2506 Sill Plate Sealer Strip Section 07 2706 Weather Resistant Barrier Section 07 5400 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO) Section 07 9000 Joint Sealers Section 07 9513 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS Section 08 1213 Hollow Metal Frames Section 08 1313 Hollow Metal Doors Section 08 1416 Flush Wood Doors Section 08 3313 Coiling Counter Doors Section 08 3323 Overhead Coiling Doors Section 08 3906 Tornado Resistant Doors Section 08 4313 Aluminum Framed Storefronts Section 08 5108 Fixed Aluminum Windows Section 08 7100 Door Hardware Section 08 8800 Glazing Section 08 9119 Wall Louvers


DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09 2116 Gypsum Board Assemblies Cover Page – UL Assemblies UL Design #U450 UL Design #V419 Section 09 2226 Suspension Systems Section 09 2815 Gypsum Sheathing Section 09 3013 Ceramic Tiling Section 09 3016 Quarry Tiling Section 09 5113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings Section 09 6466 Wood Athletic Flooring Section 09 6506 Rubber Cove Base Section 09 6519 Resilient Tile Flooring Section 09 9000 Paints and Coating DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10 1100 Visual Display Surfaces Section 10 1200 Display Cases Section 10 1416 Plaque Section 10 1419 Dimensional Signage Section 10 1420 Handicapped Parking Signs Section 10 1422 Interior Signage Section 10 2116 Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments Section 10 2813 Toilet Accessories Section 10 2814 Baby Accessories for Public Washrooms Section 10 4415 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets Section 10 5113 Metal Lockers Section 10 5114 Metal Athletic Lockers Section 10 7316 Canopies Section 10 7516 Ground-Set Flagpoles DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT Section 11 1615 Knox-Box Security Key Box Section 11 4100 Food Service Equipment Section 11 5213 Projection Screens Section 11 6123 Folding and Portable Stages Section 11 6621 Basketball Backstops Section 11 6623 Gymnasium Equipment – Wall Pads Section 11 6653 Gymnasium Dividers DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS Section 12 2414 Roller Shades Section 12 3555 Wood Laboratory Casework Section 12 3624 Plastic Laminate Countertops Section 12 6613 Telescoping Bleachers DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Section 13 3421 Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings


DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT Not Used ATTACHMENTS Room Finish Legend and Schedule

END OF VOLUME TWO DOCUMENT

VOLUME THREE INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION Document 00 0101 Project Title Page Document 00 0103 Project Information Document 00 0110 Table of Contents DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION Refer Table of Contents at beginning of Section DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Refer Table of Contents at beginning of Section DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING Refer Table of Contents at beginning of Section DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Refer Table of Contents at beginning of Section DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Not Used DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK Section 31 1000 Site Clearing Section 31 2200 Grading Section 31 2314 Building Area Sub-grade Pad Preparation Section 31 2316 Excavation - Spread and Continuous Footings Section 31 2324 Fill and Backfill Section 31 2333 Trenching and Backfilling Section 31 2500 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Section 31 3116 Termite Control Section 31 3200 Soil Stabilization Section 31 3216 Excavation


DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Section 32 1216 Asphalt Paving Section 32 1313 Concrete Paving Section 32 1314 Concrete Walks and Pads Section 32 1613 Concrete Curbs and Gutters Section 32 1723 Pavement Markings Section 32 3114 Chain Link Gates Section 32 9223 Sodding DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES Section 33 1115 Site Water Distribution Section 33 1305 Disinfection of Water Distribution Section 33 3115 Sanitary Sewerage Section 33 4915 Storm Drainage Section 33 5100 Natural Gas Distribution ATTACHMENTS Geotechnical Report

END OF VOLUME THREE DOCUMENT

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS DOCUMENT

Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OKProject No. N14023

DIVISION 21, 22 AND 23 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of ContentsDivision Section Title Pages

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION210500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 4211000 WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 19

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 7220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 8220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 4220700 PLUMBING INSULATION 12221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 12221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 6221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 7221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 4223300 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS 3223400 FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 5224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES 11

DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 5230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 5230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 4230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 11230700 HVAC DUCT INSULATION 14231123 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 9233113 METAL DUCTS 10233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 6233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 3237200 AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS 6237414 PACKAGED ROOF TOP UNITS 9238126 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 6

210500 - 1Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OKProject No. N14023

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

SECTION 210500


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditionsand Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.2. Escutcheons.3. Grout.4. Fire-suppression equipment and piping demolition.5. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.6. Painting and finishing.7. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipechases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces,crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spacesand mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact bybuilding occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:.

1. Escutcheons.

B. Welding certificates.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure VesselCode: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."



1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved

and that certification is current.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage,and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress ofconstruction, to allow for fire-suppression installations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirementsapply for product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by themanufacturers specified.

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thicknessand chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinaljoint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

2.5 ESCUTCHEONS



A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fitaround pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening

B. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

C. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying pipingsystems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of pipingsystems.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms andservice areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right anglesor parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping:

a. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-casting,cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, andconcrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.



N. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipepenetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "PenetrationFirestopping" for materials.

3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifyingpiping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threadsfull and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Joinpipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threadingis specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded ordamaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and weldingoperators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

END OF SECTION 210500


WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS

SECTION 211000

WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following fire-suppression piping inside the building:

1. Wet-pipe sprinkler systems.2. Dry-pipe sprinkler systems.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets" and "Fire Extinguishers" for cabinets andfire extinguishers.

2. Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" for alarm devices not specified in thisSection.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and that isconnected to water supply. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened.Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose connections areincluded if indicated.

B. Dry-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing compressed air.Opening of sprinklers releases compressed air and permits water pressure to open dry-pipe valve.Water then flows into piping and discharges from opened sprinklers.

C. The existing building includes areas that are currently sprinkled. There are three existing riserlocations as identified on the fire protection drawings. All areas not currently sprinkled shall be as parof this project. All new construction, including new canopies and the attic space created by the newsloped metal roof, shall be sprinkled as required by NFPA and the local code authority. Allrequirements for these areas shall be confirmed prior to bid and construction. See plan drawings foradditional requirements.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-suppression sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 20 percent, including lossesthrough water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.



2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:.

a. General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.b. Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard.c. Educational Areas: Light Hazard.

3. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:

a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. Ft. area.b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. Ft. area.c. Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Piping materials, including dielectric fittings, flexible connections, and sprinkler specialtyfittings.

2. Pipe hangers and supports.3. Valves, including listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, and specialty

valves and trim.4. Air compressors, including electrical data.5. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, mounting, finish,

and other pertinent data.6. Monitors.7. Alarm devices, including electrical data.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

D. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have beenapproved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations, if applicable. Approval ofthe authority having jurisdiction of shop drawings and calculation must be made prior to submitting toengineer for approval.

E. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performancerequirements and as described in NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Include "Contractor's Material and TestCertificate for Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for UndergroundPiping."

F. Welding certificates.

G. Field quality-control test reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For standpipe and sprinkler specialties to include in emergency,operation, and maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE

I. Installer Qualifications:



1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing fire-suppressionsystems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineeringresponsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.

J. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:Section IX.

K. NFPA Standards: Fire-suppression-system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, andtesting shall comply with the following:

1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings,including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged withprotective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounting, steel cabinet with hinged cover, with space forminimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers requiredby NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench foreach type of sprinkler on Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to productselection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of themanufacturers specified.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Threaded-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795. Pipeends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

B. Grooved-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795, hot-dipgalvanized where indicated and with factory- or field-formed, square-cut- or roll-grooved ends.

C. Schedule 10, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, Schedule 10 in NPS 5 (DN 125)and smaller; and NFPA 13-specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10 (DN 150 to DN 250), plainend.



D. Joing Methods and Fittings for Steel Pipe:

1. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1.2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3.3. Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4.4. Steel Threaded Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106,

Schedule 40, seamless steel. Include ends matching joining method.5. Steel Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865.6. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, and ASME B16.9 or ASME B16.11.7. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.8. Grooved-Joint Piping Systems:

a. Available Manufacturers:

1) Anvil International, Inc.2) Central Sprinkler Corp.3) Ductilic, Inc.4) JDH Pacific, Inc.5) National Fittings, Inc.6) Shurjoint Piping Products, Inc.7) Southwestern Pipe, Inc.8) Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div.9) Victaulic Co. of America.10) Ward Manufacturing.

b. Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed, ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting with OD matchingsteel-pipe OD.

c. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, rigid pattern, unlessotherwise indicated; gasketed fitting matching steel-pipe OD. Include ductile-ironhousing with keys matching steel-pipe and fitting grooves, prelubricated rubber gasketlisted for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts.

2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Assembly shall be copper alloy, ferrous, and insulating materials with ends matching piping system.

B. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated assembly, designed for 250-psig minimum working pressure at180 deg F. Include insulating material that isolates dissimilar materials and ends with inside threadsaccording to ASME B1.20.1.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.b. Central Plastics Company.c. Epco Sales, Inc.d. Hart Industries International, Inc.e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.f. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

C. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 175-psig minimumworking-pressure rating as required for piping system.




a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.b. Central Plastics Company.c. Epco Sales, Inc.d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

D. Dielectric Flange Insulation Kits: Components for field assembly shall include CR or phenolic gasket,PE or phenolic bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.


a. Advance Products and Systems, Inc.b. Calpico, Inc.c. Central Plastics Company.d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized steel with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining and threadedends and 300-psig working-pressure rating at 225 deg F.


a. Calpico, Inc.b. Lochinvar Corp.

F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, withcombination of plain, threaded, or grooved ends and 300-psig working-pressure rating at 225 deg F.


a. Perfection Corporation.b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.c. Victaulic Co. of America.

2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Reduced-Pressure-Detector, Fire-Protection Backflow-Preventer Assemblies:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the productindicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Ames Co.b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

3. Standard: ASSE 1047 and FMG approved or UL listed.4. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.5. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.6. Body: Cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved.7. End Connections: Flanged.



8. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through or vertical inlet, horizontal centersection, and vertical outlet or vertical flow as space permits

9. Accessories:

a. Valves: Outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet.b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.c. Bypass: With displacement-type water meter, shutoff valves, and reduced-pressure

backflow preventer. FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

B. Flexible connectors shall have materials suitable for system fluid. Include 175-psig minimumworking-pressure rating and ends according to the following:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded.2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged.3. Option for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Grooved for use with grooved-end-pipe couplings.

C. Available Manufacturers:

1. Anamet Inc.2. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.3. Flexicraft Industries.4. Flex-Pression, Ltd.5. Flex-Weld, Inc.6. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.7. Mercer Rubber Co.8. Metraflex, Inc.9. Proco Products, Inc.10. Unaflex Inc.

D. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel, inner tubingcovered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include steel nipples or flanges, welded to hose.

2.5 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY FITTINGS

A. Sprinkler specialty fittings shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimumworking-pressure rating, and made of materials compatible with piping. Sprinkler specialty fittings shallhave 250-psig minimum working-pressure rating if fittings are components of high-pressure pipingsystem.

B. Outlet Specialty Fittings:


a. Anvil International, Inc.b. Central Sprinkler Corp.c. Ductilic, Inc.d. JDH Pacific, Inc.e. National Fittings, Inc.f. Shurjoint Piping Products, Inc.g. Southwestern Pipe, Inc.h. Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div.i. Victaulic Co. of America.j. Ward Manufacturing.



2. Mechanical-T and -Cross Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with gaskets, bolts and nuts,and threaded, locking-lug, or grooved outlets.

3. Snap-On and Strapless Outlet Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing or casting with gasketand threaded outlet.

C. Sprinkler Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: Cast- or ductile-iron body; with threaded or locking-lug inletand outlet, test valve, and orifice and sight glass.


a. Central Sprinkler Corp.b. Fire-End and Croker Corp.c. Viking Corp.d. Victaulic Co. of America.

D. Sprinkler Branch-Line Test Fittings: Brass body with threaded inlet, capped drain outlet, and threadedoutlet for sprinkler.


a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.b. Fire-End and Croker Corp.c. Potter-Roemer; Fire-Protection Div.

E. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fitting: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with threaded inlet and drain outlet andsight glass.


a. AGF Manufacturing Co.b. Central Sprinkler Corp.c. G/J Innovations, Inc.d. Triple R Specialty of Ajax, Inc.

F. Drop-Nipple Fittings: UL 1474, adjustable with threaded inlet and outlet, and seals.

1. Manufacturers:

a. CECA, LLC.b. Merit.

G. Dry-Pipe-System Fittings: UL listed for dry-pipe service.

2.6 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES

A. Valves shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum pressure rating. Valves shall have250-psig minimum pressure rating if valves are components of high-pressure piping system.

B. Ball Valves: Comply with UL 1091, except with ball instead of disc.

1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.2. NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2: Bronze body with threaded ends or ductile-iron body with grooved

ends.3. NPS 3: Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.




a. NIBCO.b. Victaulic Co. of America.

C. Butterfly Valves: UL 1091.

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.


1) Global Safety Products, Inc.2) Milwaukee Valve Company.

2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, or ductile-iron body; wafer type or with flanged orgrooved ends.


1) Central Sprinkler Corp.2) Global Safety Products, Inc.3) McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.4) Mueller Company.5) NIBCO.6) Pratt, Henry Company.7) Victaulic Co. of America.

D. Check Valves NPS 2 and Larger: UL 312, swing type, cast-iron body with flanged or grooved ends.


a. AFAC Inc.b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co.c. Central Sprinkler Corp.d. Clow Valve Co.e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.g. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc.h. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.i. Grinnell Fire Protection.j. Hammond Valve.k. Matco-Norca, Inc.l. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.m. Mueller Company.n. NIBCO.o. Potter-Roemer; Fire Protection Div.p. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.q. Star Sprinkler Inc.r. Stockham.s. United Brass Works, Inc.t. Venus Fire Protection, Ltd.u. Victaulic Co. of America.v. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

E. Gate Valves: UL 262, OS&Y type.



1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.


1) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.2) Hammond Valve.3) NIBCO.4) United Brass Works, Inc.

2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron body with flanged ends.


1) Clow Valve Co.2) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.3) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.4) Hammond Valve.5) Milwaukee Valve Company.6) Mueller Company.7) NIBCO.8) Red-White Valve Corp.9) United Brass Works, Inc.

F. Indicating Valves: UL 1091, with integral indicating device and ends matching connecting piping.

1. Indicator: Electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, single-circuit, supervisory switch.2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball or butterfly valve with bronze body and threaded ends.


1) Milwaukee Valve Company.2) NIBCO.3) Victaulic Co. of America.

3. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Butterfly valve with cast- or ductile-iron body; wafer type or withflanged or grooved ends.


1) Central Sprinkler Corp.2) Grinnell Fire Protection.3) McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.4) Milwaukee Valve Company.5) NIBCO.6) Victaulic Co. of America.

2.7 UNLISTED GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

A. Ball Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: MSS SP-110, 2-piece copper-alloy body with chrome-plated brassball, 600-psig minimum CWP rating, blowout-proof stem, and threaded ends.

B. Check Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 4, Class 125 minimum, swing type with bronzebody, nonmetallic disc, and threaded ends.



C. Gate Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 2, Class 125 minimum, with bronze body, solidwedge, and threaded ends.

D. Globe Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 2, Class 125 minimum, with bronze body,nonmetallic disc, and threaded ends.

2.8 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Sprinkler System Control Valves: UL listed or FMG approved, cast- or ductile-iron body with flangedor grooved ends, and 175-psig minimum pressure rating. Control valves shall have 250-psig minimumpressure rating if valves are components of high-pressure piping system.


a. AFAC Inc.b. Central Sprinkler Corp.c. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc.d. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.e. Grinnell Fire Protection.f. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.g. Star Sprinkler Inc.h. Venus Fire Protection, Ltd.i. Victaulic Co. of America.j. Viking Corp.

2. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, designed for horizontal or vertical installation, with bronzegrooved seat with O-ring seals, single-hinge pin, and latch design. Include trim sets forbypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, retarding chamber, andfill-line attachment with strainer.

a. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main drain piping.b. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping.

3. Dry-Pipe Valves: UL 260, differential type; with bronze seat with O-ring seals, single-hingepin, and latch design. Include UL 1486, quick-opening devices, trim sets for air supply,drain, priming level, alarm connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamberattachment, and fill-line attachment.

a. Air-Pressure Maintenance Device: UL 260, automatic device to maintain correct airpressure in piping. Include shutoff valves to permit servicing without shutting downsprinkler piping, bypass valve for quick filling, pressure regulator or switch to maintainpressure, strainer, pressure ratings with 14- to 60-psig adjustable range, and 175-psigmaximum inlet pressure.

1) Available Manufacturers:

a) AFAC Inc.b) Central Sprinkler Corp.c) General Air Products, Inc.d) Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.e) Grinnell Fire Protection.f) Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.g) Star Sprinkler Inc.



h) Viking Corp.

b. Air Compressor: UL 753, fractional horsepower, 120-V ac, 60 Hz, single phase.

1) Available Manufacturers:

a) AFAC Inc.b) Gast Manufacturing, Inc.c) Grinnell Fire Protection.d) Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.e) Viking Corp.

B. Pressure-Regulating Valves: UL 1468, brass or bronze, NPS 2-1/2, 400-psig minimum rating. Includefemale NPS inlet and outlet, adjustable setting feature, and straight or 90-degree-angle pattern designas indicated.

1. Finish: Rough metal.2. Available Manufacturers:

a. AFAC Inc.b. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.c. Fire-End and Croker Corp.d. GMR International Equipment Corporation.e. Grinnell Fire Protection.f. Potter-Roemer; Fire Protection Div.g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

C. Automatic Drain Valves: UL 1726, NPS 1, ball-check device with threaded ends.


a. AFAC Inc.b. Grinnell Fire Protection.

2.9 CONTROL PANELS

A. Description: Single-area, two-area, or single-area cross-zoned type control panel as indicated,including NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure, detector, alarm, and solenoid-valve circuitry for operationof deluge valves. Panels contain power supply; battery charger; standby batteries; field-wiring terminalstrip; electrically supervised solenoid valves and polarized fire alarm bell; lamp test facility; single-pole,double-throw auxiliary alarm contacts; and rectifier.

1. Panels: UL listed and FMG approved when used with thermal detectors and Class Adetector circuit wiring. Electrical characteristics are 120-V ac, 60 Hz, with 24-V dcrechargeable batteries.

2. Manual Control Stations: Electric operation, metal enclosure, labeled "MANUAL CONTROLSTATION" with operating instructions and a cover held closed by breakable strut.

3. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 pipe nipple, and bronzeball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operatinginstructions and cover held closed by breakable strut.



2.10 SPRINKLERS

A. Sprinklers shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum pressure rating. Sprinklersshall have 250-psig minimum pressure rating if sprinklers are components of high-pressure pipingsystem.

B. Available Manufacturers:

1. AFAC Inc.2. Central Sprinkler Corp.3. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc.4. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.5. Grinnell Fire Protection.6. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.7. Star Sprinkler Inc.8. Venus Fire Protection, Ltd.9. Victaulic Co. of America.10. Viking Corp.

C. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the following:

1. UL 199, for nonresidential applications.2. UL 1626, for residential applications.3. UL 1767, for early-suppression, fast-response applications.

D. Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice for "Ordinary" temperature classificationrating, unless otherwise indicated or required by application.

1. Open Sprinklers: UL 199, without heat-responsive element.

a. Orifice: ½ inch, with discharge coefficient K between 5.3 and 5.8.b. Orifice: 17/32 inch, with discharge coefficient K between 7.4 and 8.2.

E. Sprinkler types, features, and options as follows:

1. Concealed ceiling sprinklers, including cover plate.2. Extended-coverage sprinklers.3. Flow-control sprinklers, with automatic open and shutoff feature.4. Flush ceiling sprinklers, including escutcheon.5. High-pressure sprinklers.6. Institution sprinklers, made with a small, breakaway projection.7. Open sprinklers.8. Pendent sprinklers.9. Pendent, dry-type sprinklers.10. Quick-response sprinklers.11. Recessed sprinklers, including escutcheon.12. Sidewall sprinklers.13. Sidewall, dry-type sprinklers.14. Upright sprinklers.

F. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome plated, bronze, and painted.

G. Special Coatings: Wax, lead, and corrosion-resistant paint.



H. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications.Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.

1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, 2 piece, with 1-inch vertical adjustment.2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.

I. Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

2.11 ALARM DEVICES

A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.

B. Electrically Operated Alarm: UL 464, with 8-inchminimum- diameter, vibrating-type, metal alarm bellwith red-enamel factory finish and suitable for outdoor use.


a. Potter Electric Signal Company.b. System Sensor.

C. Water-Flow Indicator: UL 346, electrical-supervision, paddle-operated-type, water-flow detector with250-psig pressure rating and designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Include two single-pole,double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-Vdc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproofcover that sends signal if removed.


a. ADT Security Services, Inc.b. Grinnell Fire Protection.c. ITT McDonnell & Miller.d. Potter Electric Signal Company.e. System Sensor.f. Viking Corp.g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

D. Pressure Switch: UL 753, electrical-supervision-type, water-flow switch with retard feature. Includesingle-pole, double-throw, normally closed contacts and design that operates on rising pressure andsignals water flow.


a. Grinnell Fire Protection.b. Potter Electric Signal Company.c. System Sensor.d. Viking Corp.

E. Valve Supervisory Switch: UL 753, electrical, single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closedcontacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position.


a. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.b. Potter Electric Signal Company.



c. System Sensor.

2.12 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Available Manufacturers:

1. AGF Manufacturing Co.2. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.3. Brecco Corporation.4. Dresser Equipment Group; Instrument Div.5. Marsh Bellofram.6. WIKA Instrument Corporation.

B. Description: UL 393, 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch- diameter, dial pressure gage with range of 0 to 250 psigminimum.

1. Water System Piping: Include caption "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" on dial face.2. Air System Piping: Include retard feature and caption "AIR" or "AIR/WATER" on dial face

2.13 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Manufacturers:

1. AFAC Inc.2. Central Sprinkler Corp.3. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.4. Fire-End and Croker Corp.5. Fire Protection Products, Inc.6. GMR International Equipment Corporation.7. Guardian Fire Equipment Incorporated.8. Potter-Roemer; Fire-Protection Div.9. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.10. United Brass Works, Inc.

B. Wall-Type, Fire Department Connection: UL 405, 175-psig minimum pressure rating; withcorrosion-resistant-metal body with brass inlets, brass wall escutcheon plate, brass lugged caps withgaskets and brass chains, and brass lugged swivel connections. Include inlets with threads accordingto NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and threads, outlet with pipe threads,extension pipe nipples, check devices or clappers for inlets, and escutcheon plate with marking similarto "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE."

1. Type: Flush, with the number of inlets required by the local authority and square orrectangular escutcheon plate.

2. Type: 4x4 with 30 degree angle Storz Fire Department Connection.3. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION



A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system designcalculations required in Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for hose connections and stations to verify actual locations of piping connectionsbefore installation.

B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable thicknesses, fire- and smoke-rated construction, framing forhose-station cabinets, and other conditions where hose connections and stations are to be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS, GENERAL

A. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated.

B. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.

C. Flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings with finish and pressureratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground applications,unless otherwise indicated.

D. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight steelpipe with threaded ends; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

3.4 SPRINKLER SYSTEM PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Standard-Pressure, Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System, 175-psig Maximum Working Pressure: Choose frommaterials and joining methods from section 2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS above that meet NFPA and Stateof Oklahoma requirements.

B. Standard-Pressure, Dry-Pipe Sprinkler System, 175-psig Maximum Working Pressure: Choose frommaterials and joining methods from section 2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS above that meet NFPA and Stateof Oklahoma requirements.

3.5 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the followingrequirements apply:

1. Listed Fire-Protection Valves: UL listed and FMG approved for applications where requiredby NFPA 13.

a. Shutoff Duty: Use ball, butterfly, or gate valves.

2. Unlisted General-Duty Valves: For applications where UL-listed and FMG-approved valvesare not required by NFPA 13.



a. Shutoff Duty: Use ball, butterfly, or gate valves.b. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves.

3.6 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire-Suppression" for basic piping jointconstruction.

B. Threaded Joints: Comply with NFPA 13 for pipe thickness and threads. Do not thread pipe smallerthan NPS 8 (DN 200) with wall thickness less than Schedule 40 unless approved by authorities havingjurisdiction and threads are checked by a ring gage and comply with ASME B1.20.1.

C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with listed coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts.

1. Ductile-Iron Pipe: Radius-cut-groove ends of piping. Use grooved-end fittings andgrooved-end-pipe couplings.

2. Steel Pipe: Square-cut or roll-groove piping as indicated. Use grooved-end fittings andrigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Copper Tube: Roll-groove tubing. Use grooved-end fittings and grooved-end-tubecouplings.

4. Dry-Pipe Systems: Use fittings and gaskets listed for dry-pipe service.

D. Dissimilar-Metal Piping Joints: Construct joints using dielectric fittings compatible with both pipingmaterials.

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions, couplings, or nipples.2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.3. NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange insulation kits.

3.7 SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING

A. Connect fire-suppression piping to water-service piping of size and in location indicated for serviceentrance to building. Refer to Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for exterior piping.

B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated atconnection to water-service piping. Refer to Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for backflowpreventers.

3.8 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression" for basic piping installation.

B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location andarrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authoritieshaving jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approvedworking plans.



C. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipesizes.

D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller. Unions are not required on flangeddevices or in piping installations using grooved joints.

E. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and largerconnections.

F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, sized andlocated according to NFPA 13.

G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

H. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes whensprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.

I. Install drain valves on standpipes.

J. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves. Drainto floor drain or outside building.

K. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

L. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials.

1. Install standpipe system piping according to NFPA 14.2. Install sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13.

M. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake damage.

N. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of eachstandpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft metal seatedglobe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, andinstall where they will not be subject to freezing.

O. Drain dry-pipe sprinkler piping.

P. Pressurize and check dry-pipe sprinkler system piping and air-pressure maintenance devices.

Q. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler system piping with water.

3.9 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, andspecialties according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water supplyexcept from fire department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion ofsystem controlled by each valve.

C. Specialty Valves:



1. Alarm Check Valves: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, including bypasscheck valve and retarding chamber drain-line connection.

2. Dry-Pipe Valves: Install trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm connections, balldrip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment.

a. Air-Pressure Maintenance Devices for Dry-Pipe Systems: Install shutoff valves topermit servicing without shutting down sprinkler system; bypass valve for quicksystem filling; pressure regulator or switch to maintain system pressure; strainer;pressure ratings with 14- to 60-psig adjustable range; and 175-psig maximum inletpressure.

b. Install air compressor and compressed-air supply piping.c. Install compressed-air supply piping from building's compressed-air piping system.

3.10 SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings indicate sprinkler types to be used. Where specific types are not indicated, use the followingsprinkler types:

1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers, including sprinkler guards in Gymnasiumspaces.

2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Concealed sprinklers.3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.4. Sprinkler Finishes:

a. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spacesexposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coatedwhere exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.

b. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate.

3.11 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels and tiles.

B. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. Use dry-typesprinklers with water supply from heated space or dry-pipe system. Confirm attic space sprinklerrequirements and areas subject to freezing prior to submitting shop drawings for AHJ approval.

3.12 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-type, fire department connections in vertical wall.

B. Install ball drip valve at each check valve for fire department connection.

3.13 CONNECTIONS

A. Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 26.

B. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm.

C. Connect compressed-air supply to dry-pipe sprinkler piping.



D. Connect air compressor to the following piping and wiring:

1. Pressure gages and controls.2. Electrical power system.3. Fire alarm devices, including low-pressure alarm

E. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

F. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors andCables."

G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tighteningvalues. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A andUL 486B.

3.14 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13.

3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest untilno leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls andequipment.

3. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.4. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"

Chapter.5. Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems according to NFPA 14, "System Acceptance"

Chapter.6. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.7. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.

3.16 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.

C. Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion.



COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

SECTION 220500


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.2. Transition fittings.3. Dielectric fittings.4. Sleeves.5. Escutcheons.6. Grout.7. Plumbing demolition.8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.9. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipechases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces,crawlspaces, and tunnels.


C. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by buildingoccupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Transition fittings.2. Dielectric fittings.3. Escutcheons.





A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural WeldingCode--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure VesselCode: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."



C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics maybe furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electricalservices, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings orefficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.



1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress ofconstruction, to allow for plumbing installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete andother structural components as they are constructed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS










B. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according toASTM B 813.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing,unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwiseindicated.

D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thicknessand chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.


A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain,or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180deg F.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.b. Central Plastics Company.c. Eclipse, Inc.d. Epco Sales, Inc.e. Hart Industries, International, Inc.f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimumworking pressure as required to suit system pressures.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.b. Central Plastics Company.c. Epco Sales, Inc.d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- orring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, andsteel backing washers.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. Calpico, Inc.c. Central Plastics Company.d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig minimumworking pressure where required to suit system pressures.



F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain,threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

2.5 SLEEVES



C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends andintegral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clampingring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

2.6 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fitaround pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.


D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.


2.7 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous,and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLUMBING DEMOLITION



A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" and Division 02 Section "Selective StructureDemolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.

B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing systems, equipment, and components indicated to beremoved.

1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plugremaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

2. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, removedamaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.



B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of pipingsystems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviationsto layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.





G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

K. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.b. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-casting,

cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

L. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.



M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roofslabs.


O. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

P. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-inrequirements.





D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end.Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solderalloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter,using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads fulland clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipefittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry sealthreading is specified.


G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and weldingoperators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connectionto each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at finalconnection to each piece of equipment.

3. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materialsof dissimilar metals.



3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are notindicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems andcomponents in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement ofcomponents. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to otherinstallations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation tosupport and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.7 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment baseplates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout around anchors.

G. Cure placed grout.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

SECTION 220529


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for plumbing system piping and equipment:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.2. Trapeze pipe hangers.3. Metal framing systems.4. Fiberglass strut systems.5. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.6. Fastener systems.7. Pipe stands.8. Pipe positioning systems.9. Equipment supports.


1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapezehangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for pipe hangers forfire-suppression piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."


A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight ofsupported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipmentand connected systems and components.

1.5 SUBMITTALS




1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.2. Fiberglass pipe hangers.3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.4. Powder-actuated fastener systems.5. Pipe positioning systems.



A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."3. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hangerand Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.

B. Manufacturers:

1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc.2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports.3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.5. Empire Industries, Inc.6. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.8. Grinnell Corp.9. GS Metals Corp.10. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.11. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.12. PHS Industries, Inc.13. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.14. Tolco Inc.

C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.



D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearingsurface of piping.

2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made fromstructural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels andother components.

B. Manufacturers:

1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.3. GS Metals Corp.4. Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.5. Thomas & Betts Corporation.6. Tolco Inc.7. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.

C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.


2.5 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Description: 100-psigminimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.3. PHS Industries, Inc.4. Pipe Shields, Inc.5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc.6. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicateor ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.

D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicateor ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass.

E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.



G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient airtemperature.

2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete withpull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials whereused.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Hilti, Inc.b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.d. MKT Fastening, LLC.e. Powers Fasteners.

2.7 PIPE STAND FABRICATION

A. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistantcomponents to support roof-mounted piping.

B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod-roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped cradleto support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

1. Manufacturers:

a. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.b. MIRO Industries.

C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic base unit with plastic roller, for roof installationwithout membrane penetration.

2.8 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipespaces for plumbing fixtures for commercial applications.

B. Manufacturers:

1. C & S Mfg. Corp.2. HOLDRITE Corp.; Hubbard Enterprises.3. Samco Stamping, Inc.

2.9 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel shapes.



2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallicgrout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems andequipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in pipingsystem Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will nothave field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in directcontact with copper tubing.

E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in pipingsystem Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated orinsulated stationary pipes, NPS ½ to NPS 30.

2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS ½ to NPS 24,if little or no insulation is required.

3. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS ½ to NPS 4, to allow off-centerclosure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

4. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension ofnoninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

5. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationarypipes, NPS ½ to NPS 8.

6. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): Forsuspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.

7. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS ½ to NPS 30.

G. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping systemSections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.



5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

H. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections,install the following types:

1. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joistconstruction to attach to top flange of structural shape.

2. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,channels, or angles.

3. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams4. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.5. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge.6. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

I. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections,install the following types:

1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulationthat matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer toprevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

J. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping systemSections, install the following types:

.1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4

inches.2. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion

in piping systems.

K. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified inpiping system Sections.

L. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specifiedin piping system Sections.

M. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and wastepiping for plumbing fixtures.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports,clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support togetheron field-assembled metal framing systems.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

D. Pipe Positioning System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste pipingconnections to each plumbing fixture. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for plumbingfixtures.



E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and otheraccessories.

F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, topermit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints,expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses frommovement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipedeflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.

K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project throughinsulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insertwith clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building servicespiping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier isindicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distributionplate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shieldsshall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distributionplate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to supportequipment above floor.



B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shopwelded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance andquality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosionresistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieveindicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.



IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

SECTION 220553


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Equipment labels.2. Pipe labels.3. Stencils.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification materialand device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed contentfor each label.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaceswhere devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch, Aluminum, 0.032-inch or anodized aluminum,0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachmenthardware.



2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,½ inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greaterviewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size ofprincipal lettering.

4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,1/16inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: Black.3. Background Color: White.4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-

1/2 by 3/4 inch.6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,

½ inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greaterviewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size ofprincipal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawingnumbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Sectionnumber and title where equipment is specified.

D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bondpaper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment isindicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title whereequipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicatingservice, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe andto attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviationsas used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate bothdirections, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.

2.3 STENCILS



A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; and minimum letter heightof 3/4 inch for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions.

1. Stencil Material: Aluminum.2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be

in pressurized spray-can form.3. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless

otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices,including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting."

B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels,at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles on eachpiping system.

1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machinerooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposedlocations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where

flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas

of congested piping and equipment.7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:



1. Domestic Water Piping:

a. Background Color: White.b. Letter Color: Black.



PLUMBING INSULATION

SECTION 220700

PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Insulation Materials:

a. Flexible elastomeric.b. Mineral fiber.

2. Adhesives.3. Mastics.4. Lagging adhesives.5. Sealants.6. Factory-applied jackets.7. Field-applied jackets.8. Tapes.9. Securements.10. Corner angles.


1. Division 21 Section "Fire-Suppression Systems Insulation."2. Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets(both factory and field applied, if any).

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type ofinsulation and hanger.

2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type

of insulation.5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels.6. Detail application of field-applied jackets.


PLUMBING INSULATION

7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.8. Detail field application for each equipment type.

C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing productand intended use. Sample sizes are as follows:

1. Sample Sizes:

a. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches long by NPS 2.b. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches square.c. Jacket Materials for Pipe: 12 inches long by NPS 2.d. Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches square.e. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full

range of colors available for each type of finish material.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdictionindicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers,attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and testmethods employed.

F. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeshipprogram or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau ofApprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-responsecharacteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing andinspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacketmaterials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings ofapplicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed indexof 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developedindex of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTMstandard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 22Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


PLUMBING INSULATION

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and equipmentInstaller for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish andmaintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes andfor space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according toASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534,Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.

G. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one ofthe following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are notlimited to, the following]:

a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.c. Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation.d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

2. Type I, 850 Deg F, Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bondinginsulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal.


PLUMBING INSULATION

b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive.c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75.d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may beincorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82.b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bondinginsulation jacket lap seams and joints.

2.3 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply withMIL-C-19565C, Type II.

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry filmthickness.

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.4. Color: White.

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F.3. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight.4. Color: White.

2.4 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulationmaterials, jackets, and substrates.


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-52.b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-42.c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130.d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 11-30.e. Vimasco Corporation; 136.


PLUMBING INSULATION

2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adherefire-resistant lagging cloths over equipment and pipe insulation.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F.4. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may beincorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8.b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44.c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.e. Vimasco Corporation; 750.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.5. Color: Aluminum.

B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.4. Color: White.

2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. Whenfactory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complyingwith ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by aremovable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complyingwith ASTM C 1136, Type II.

2.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complyingwith ASTM C 1136.


PLUMBING INSULATION


a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835.b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105.c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ.d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches.3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.5. Elongation: 2 percent.6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.2. Thickness: 6.5 mils.3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.4. Elongation: 2 percent.5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and otherconditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that willadversely affect insulation application.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosioncoating to insulated surfaces as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and anepoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F.Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods foroperating temperature range.


PLUMBING INSULATION

2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materialsand application methods for operating temperature range.

C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements forheat tracing that apply to insulation.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; freeof voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required foreach item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessoriesthat do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesiverecommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taperand seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation toinsulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation materialmanufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields overjacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet anddry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.

Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced4 inches o.c.


PLUMBING INSULATION

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinalseams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps withoutward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer tomaintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and atends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominalthickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due tothermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extendpatches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to buttjoints.

P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:.

1. Testing agency labels and stamps.2. Nameplates and data plates.3. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and

seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, installinsulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with jointsealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roofflashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Installinsulation continuously through walls and partitions.

C. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuouslythrough penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping"irestopping andfire-resistive joint sealers.

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION


PLUMBING INSULATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specificrequirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties withcontinuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from samematerial and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly againstadjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaceswith insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform withadjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of samematerial and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butteach section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of samematerial, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulationby not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whicheveris thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs,bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of samematerial, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulationby not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whicheveris thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainersso strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging theinsulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambientservices, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlapadjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or onepipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic.Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for aboveambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic toa smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric andpolyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions.Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing usingPVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Matchsize and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, testconnections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, andequipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection withinsulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thicknessas that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulationfrom flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipeinsulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steelor aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.


PLUMBING INSULATION

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except dividethe two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of miteredblocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation,to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation oneach side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation withinsulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. Afterfirst coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaceswith a metal jacket.

3.6 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminateopenings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness aspipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesiveto eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation whenavailable.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheetinsulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valveoperation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air tosurface being insulated.

3.7 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bandswithout deforming insulation materials.


PLUMBING INSULATION

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions withvapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps withoutward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staplelongitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulationmaterial manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation whenavailable.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections ofpipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materialswith wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:


2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation tovalve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation withoutdisturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation withfactory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inchthick coats of lagging adhesive.3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at end

joints.


PLUMBING INSULATION

5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation withvapor-barrier mastic.

3.9 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for eachpiping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selectionfrom materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.2. Underground piping.3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.10 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Cold Water:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: ½ inch thick.

2. NPS 1-1/4 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: ½ inch thick.

B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:.

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.



DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

SECTION 221116


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialtiesinside the building.

2. Specialty valves.3. Escutcheons.4. Sleeves and sleeve seals.5. Wall penetration systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following products:

1. Specialty valves.2. Transition fittings.3. Dielectric fittings.4. Escutcheons.5. Sleeves and sleeve seals.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owneror others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to providetemporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Architect's written permission.



1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials,and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.

1. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.2. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.4. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with

ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, annealed temper.

1. Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

2.3 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe:

1. AWWA C151/A21.51, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved orflanged ends are indicated.

2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubbergaskets, and steel bolts.

B. Standard-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, ductile or gray iron.2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber

gaskets, and steel bolts.

C. Compact-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings:

1. AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile iron.2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber

gaskets, and steel bolts.



2.4 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21,nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwiseindicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according toASTM B 813.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-dutybrazing unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" forgeneral-duty metal valves.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancingvalves, drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum breakers.

2.6 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements:

1. Same size as pipes to be joined.2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.


a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing.b. Dresser, Inc.; Dresser Piping Specialties.c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The).d. JCM Industries.e. Romac Industries, Inc.f. Smith-Blair, Inc; a Sensus company.g. Viking Johnson; c/o Mueller Co.


A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body withseparating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

B. Dielectric Unions:




a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.b. Central Plastics Company.c. EPCO Sales, Inc.d. Hart Industries International, Inc.e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

2. Description:

a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig at 180 deg F.b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing

a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.b. Central Plastics Company.c. EPCO Sales, Inc.d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded

solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Kits:


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. Calpico, Inc.c. Central Plastics Company.d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Nipples:




a. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.c. Victaulic Company.

2. Description:

a. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.b. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.c. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.d. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

2.8 ESCUTCHEONS

A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.

B. One Piece, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated finish with setscrews.

C. One Piece, Deep Pattern: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish.

D. One Piece, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with setscrew or spring clips.

E. Split Casting, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge and setscrew.

2.9 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Fabricated of cast iron, and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plainends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with weldedlongitudinal joint.

C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc-coated, withplain ends.

D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clampingring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.

2.10 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, andbackfilling.


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domesticwater piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout areapproved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600 andAWWA M41.

D. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

E. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.

F. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unlessotherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

G. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right anglesor parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

H. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, andcoordinate with other services occupying that space.

I. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.

J. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

K. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher thansystem pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

L. Install piping free of sags and bends.

M. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

N. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

O. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section"Domestic Water Pumps" for thermostats.


A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.



B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings beforeassembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads fulland clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipefittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "BrazedJoints" Chapter.

E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittingsaccording to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

F. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2015. Use tool designedfor copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and brazebranch tube into collar.

G. Copper-Tubing Grooved Joints: Roll groove end of tube. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket,lubricant, and bolts. Join copper tube and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 forroll-grooved joints.

H. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both pipingsystems.


A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves forPlumbing Piping" for valve installations.

B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures orequipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that donot have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gatevalves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, andwhere required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "DomesticWater Piping Specialties."

1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches.2. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated.

D. Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pumpand circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball valves for pipingNPS 2 and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Comply with requirementsin Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves.

E. Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side ofeach pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow.Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for calibratedbalancing valves.



3.5 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metaltransition fittings or unions.

3.6 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.


A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping andEquipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.c. Longer Than 100 Feet If Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum roddiameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.



C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilarpiping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to thefollowing:

1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but notsmaller than sizes of water heater connections.

2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller thanrequired by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbing fixtureSections for connection sizes.

3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipmentconnections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead ofunions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.9 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

B. Escutcheons for New Piping:

1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern.2. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished

chrome-plated finish.

C. Escutcheons for Existing Piping:

1. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split casting, cast brass with chrome-plated finish.2. Insulated Piping: Split plate, stamped steel with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and

spring clips.

3.10 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in floors,partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

E. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.

F. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation using jointsealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.

G. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipepenetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07Section "Penetration Firestopping" for firestop materials and installations.



3.11 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification forPlumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation.

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Piping Inspections:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approvedby authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspectionmust be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing orclosing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observetests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests orinspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Piping Tests:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound andthat piping is full of water.

2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for eachtest, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered andunconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered orconcealed before it was tested.

4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, withoutexceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to standfor four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof untilsatisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.13 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.



2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping toprovide flow of hot water in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping duringinstallation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use.8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.14 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repairedbefore using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; ifmethods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 orAWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear atoutlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm ofchlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm ofchlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming fromsystem after the standing time.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeatprocedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.15 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used inapplications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground coppertubing.



D. Under-building-slab, domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Hard or soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper solder-joint fittings; andbrazed joints.

E. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought- copper solder-joint fittings; and solderedjoints.

F. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper solder-joint fittings; and solderedjoints.

G. Under-building-slab, fire piping, NPS 4 to NPS 12 (DN 150 to DN 300), shall be the following:

1. Plain-end, ductile-iron pipe; grooved-joint, ductile-iron-pipe appurtenances; and groovedjoints.

3.16 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the followingrequirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, orgate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or ballvalves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory-stop balancing valves.4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.



DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

SECTION 221119


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:

1. Vacuum breakers.2. Backflow preventers.3. Balancing valves.4. Strainers.5. Wall hydrants.6. Water hammer arresters.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwiseindicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency,operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plasticdomestic water piping components.

2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1through 9."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers::


a. Ames Co.b. Cash Acme.c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.d. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.e. Rain Bird Corporation.f. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div.g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1001.3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping.4. Body: Bronze.5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.6. Finish: Rough bronze.

B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:


a. Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc.b. Cash Acme.c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.d. Legend Valve.e. MIFAB, Inc.f. Prier Products, Inc.g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.h. Woodford Manufacturing Company.i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.j. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1011.3. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.4. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.5. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated.

C. Laboratory-Faucet Vacuum Breakers:


a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.b. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.c. Woodford Manufacturing Company.d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1035.



3. Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 3/8 matching faucet size.4. Body: Bronze.5. End Connections: Threaded.6. Finish: Chrome plated.

2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers:


a. Cash Acme.b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.c. Honeywell Water Controls.d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1012.3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.4. Body: Bronze.5. End Connections: Union, solder joint.6. Finish: Rough bronze.

B. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:


2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the productindicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Ames Co.b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.c. Flomatic Corporation.d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

3. Standard: ASSE 1013.4. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.5. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.6. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with

AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.7. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.8. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through or vertical inlet, horizontal center

section, and vertical outlet or vertical flow as space permits9. Accessories:

a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet ofNPS 2 and smaller; outsidescrew and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 andlarger.

b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.

2.3 BALANCING VALVES



A. Copper-Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves:


a. Armstrong International, Inc.b. Flo Fab Inc.c. ITT Industries; Bell & Gossett Div.d. NIBCO INC.e. TAC Americas.f. Taco, Inc.g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

2. Type: Ball valve with two readout ports and memory setting indicator.3. Body: Brass or bronze,4. Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2.5. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.

B. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves:


a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.e. Hammond Valve.f. Milwaukee Valve Company.g. NIBCO INC.h. Red-White Valve Corp.

2. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves.3. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.4. Size: NPS 2 or smaller.5. Body: Copper alloy.6. Port: Standard or full port.7. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.8. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.9. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded.10. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device.

2.4 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated.2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller.3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller;flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated.5. Perforation Size:

a. StrainersNPS 2 and Smaller: 0.020 inch [0.062 inch.



6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.

2.5 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants:


a. Josam Company.b. MIFAB, Inc.c. Prier Products, Inc.d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.f. Watts Drainage Products Inc.g. Woodford Manufacturing Company.h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants.3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.4. Operation: Loose key.5. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall clamp.6. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1.7. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7.8. Box: Deep, flush mounting with cover.9. Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze.10. Operating Keys(s): One with each wall hydrant.

2.6 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.3. Size: NPS 3/4.4. Body: Copper alloy.5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and

cap with brass chain.

2.7 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water Hammer Arresters:




a. AMTROL, Inc.b. Josam Company.c. MIFAB, Inc.d. PPP Inc.e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.h. Watts Drainage Products Inc.i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.3. Type: Copper tube with piston.4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, jointconstruction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.

C. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each pump.

D. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate generalarrangement of piping and specialties.


A. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above.



SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

SECTION 221316


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

C. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.

D. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

E. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure,unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



2.2 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class(es).

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.

2.4 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. Sovent Stack Fittings: ASME B16.45 or ASSE 1043, hubless, cast-iron aerator and deaeratordrainage fittings.

C. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners,and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

1. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-steelbands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

a. Manufacturers:

1) ANACO.2) Clamp-All Corp.3) Ideal Div.; Stant Corp.4) Mission Rubber Co.5) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.

2. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Cast-Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48/A 48M, two-piece, cast-ironhousing; stainless-steel bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

a. Manufacturers:

1) MG Piping Products Co.



2.5 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

2.6 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.

1. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper,solder-joint fittings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, and heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel

couplings; and coupled joints.3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, Rigid, unshielded, nonpressure pipe couplings

for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD.

B. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:


couplings; and coupled joints.3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. PVC cannot be used

in return air plenums.4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, Rigid, unshielded, nonpressure pipe couplings


C. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be any of the following:


couplings; and coupled joints.3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, Rigid, unshielded, nonpressure pipe couplings


D. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller for grease waste shall be any of thefollowing:




couplings; and coupled joints.3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, Rigid, unshielded, nonpressure pipe couplings



A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results forPlumbing."

B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitarysewers.

C. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

D. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches,bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on verticalstacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe.Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow morethan 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes areconnected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades andalignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Installrequired gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, andother installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

F. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwiseindicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 andsmaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

G. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab iswithout membrane waterproofing.

H. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authoritieshaving jurisdiction.


A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common WorkResults for Plumbing."

B. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipeand Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.



C. Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and FittingsHandbook" for hubless-coupling joints.


A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for PlumbingPiping and Equipment." Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.c. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping andEquipment."

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimumrod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

G. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum roddiameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod.3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod.4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod.5. NPS 3: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

H. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.

I. Install supports for vertical ABS and PVC piping every 48 inches.

J. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's writteninstructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.



B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to joindissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than requiredby plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, butnot smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smallerthan required by plumbing code.

4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, andunion for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 andlarger.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must bemade. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in afterroughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observetests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, makerequired corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or,in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for eachtest, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and ventpiping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealedbefore it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outsideleaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with waterto point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes beforeinspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints forleaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filledwith water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stackopenings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into pipingsystem equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of watercloset to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducingadditional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gasand water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, untilsatisfactory results are obtained.



6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and toprevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.



SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

SECTION 221319


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:

1. Cleanouts.2. Floor drains.3. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.


A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intendeduse.

C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary pipingspecialty components.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Metal Floor Cleanouts:


a. Josam Company; Josam Div.b. Oatey.c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.



e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.f. Watts Drainage Products Inc.g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout.3. Size: Same as connected branch.4. Type: Adjustable housing.5. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.6. Outlet Connection: Threaded.7. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.8. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron.9. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Stainless steel.10. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.11. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.12. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.13. Provide carpet marker or carpet flange in carpeted areas.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:


a. Commercial Enameling Co.b. Josam Company; Josam Div.c. MIFAB, Inc.d. Prier Products, Inc.e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.g. Watts Drainage Products Inc.h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3.3. Pattern: Floor drain.4. Body Material: Gray iron.5. Seepage Flange: Required.6. Anchor Flange: Required.7. Clamping Device: Required.8. Outlet: Bottom.9. Top or Strainer Material: Bronze.10. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.11. Top Shape: Round.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Air-Gap Fittings:

1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap betweeninstalled inlet and outlet piping.



2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.4. Outlet: Larger than inlet.5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect

waste piping.

B. Sleeve Flashing Device:

1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that forms sleeve for pipefloor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top offitting that will extend 1 inch above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension inbottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.

2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.

C. Vent Caps:

1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Includevented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, jointconstruction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unlessotherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unlesslarger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger

piping.4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finishedfloor.

D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, withframe and cover flush with finished wall.

E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finishedfloor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set

with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:

a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inchtotal depression.



b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-

inch total depression.

3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoiningflooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwiseindicated.

F. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge intosanitary drainage system.

G. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.

H. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and withincabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate generalarrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and toprevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.



ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

SECTION 223300


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Light-commercial electric water heaters.2. Water heater accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operatingcharacteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.


C. Operation and maintenance data.

D. Warranty.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intendeduse.

B. ASME Compliance: Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercialwater heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,Division 1.

C. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9"for all components that will be in contact with potable water.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replacecomponents of electric water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warrantyperiod.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.b. Faulty operation of controls.c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.



2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:

a. Commercial Electric Water Heaters: Five years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



2.2 LIGHT-COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

A. Description: Comply with UL 174 for household, storage electric water heaters.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Bradford White Corporation.b. Smith, A. O. Water Products Company.c. State Industries, Inc.

2.3 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than base ofwater heater and include drain outlet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases.

1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation on stand,bracket, suspended platform, or direct on floor is indicated.

2. Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "BasicPlumbing Materials and Methods."

B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referencedstandards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devicesneeding service are accessible.

C. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use reliefvalves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial, water-heater, relief-valveoutlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward pitch, and dischargeby positive air gap onto closest floor drain.



D. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or overfloor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters that do nothave tank drains. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for hose-end drain valves.

E. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters.

F. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without integralor fitting-type heat traps.

G. Fill water heaters with water.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for easyremoval of water heaters.

B. Install equipment according to applicable Division 16 Sections.


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation.3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

B. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specifiedabove.



FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

SECTION 223400


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following fuel-fired water heaters:

1. Commercial, power-burner, storage, gas water heaters.2. Instantaneous, gas-fired, tankless water heater.3. Water heater accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operatingcharacteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.


C. Operation and maintenance data.

D. Warranty.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intendeduse.

B. ASME Compliance: Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercialwater heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,Division 1.

C. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9"for all components that will be in contact with potable water.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replacecomponents of fuel-fired water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warrantyperiod.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.b. Faulty operation of controls.c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.



2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:

a. Commercial, Gas Water Heaters: Five years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



2.2 COMMERCIAL, GAS WATER HEATERS

A. Commercial, Power-Burner, Storage, Gas Water Heaters: Comply with ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Bradford White Corporation.b. Statec. Smith, A. O. Water Products Company.

2. Storage-Tank Construction: Non-ASME-code steel with 150-psig working-pressure rating.

a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Attach tappings totank before testing.

3. Factory-Installed, Storage-Tank Appurtenances:

a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.b. Dip Tube: Provide unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank.c. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005.d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Surround entire storage tank except

connections and controls.e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.f. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.

Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as heatinput, and include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating.Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

4. Burner: Comply with UL 795 for power-burner water heaters and for natural-gas fuel.

a. Automatic Ignition: ANSI Z21.20, electric, automatic, gas-ignition system.

5. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.6. Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices or

systems.



7. Special Requirements: NSF 5 construction.

2.3 INSTANTANEOUS, GAS WATER HEATERS

A. Description: Comply with ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3, except storage is not required.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Rinnaib. NORITZ America Corporation.c. Paloma Industries, Inc.d. Takagi Industrial Co. USA, Inc.

2. Construction: Copper piping or tubing complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potablewater, without storage capacity.

a. Tappings: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.c. Heat Exchanger: Copper tubing.d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 or ASHRAE 90.2.e. Burner: For use with tankless water heaters and for natural-gas fuel.f. Automatic Ignition: Manufacturer's proprietary system for automatic, gas ignition.g. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.h. Jacket: Metal with enameled finish or plastic.

3. Support: Bracket for floor or wall, as indicated.

2.4 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15/CGA 9.1, manually operated. Furnish for installation in piping.

B. Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18, appliance type. Include pressure rating, capacity, andpressure differential required between gas supply and water heater.

C. Gas Automatic Valves: ANSI Z21.21, appliance, electrically operated, on-off automatic valve.

D. Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel bracket forwall mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water.

E. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Provide dimensions not less than base ofwater heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4.

F. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 orASHRAE 90.2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION



A. Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases.

1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation on stand,bracket, suspended platform, or direct on floor is indicated.

2. Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "CommonWork Results for Plumbing."

B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referencedstandards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devicesneeding service are accessible.

C. Install gas water heaters according to NFPA 54.

1. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters without shutoff valves.2. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas water heaters without gas pressure

regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas pressure at burner.3. Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters, if required for operation

of safety control.

D. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use reliefvalves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial, water-heater, relief-valveoutlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward pitch, and dischargeby positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

E. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in water piping for water heaters withoutstorage. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domesticwater piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

F. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or overfloor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters that do nothave tank drains. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for hose-enddrain valves.

G. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gagesfor Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.

H. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without integralor fitting-type heat traps.

I. Fill water heaters with water.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for easyremoval of water heaters.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors andCables."




A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect installation, including connections.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation.3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

C. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specifiedabove.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,operate, and maintain commercial water heaters. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration andTraining."



PLUMBING FIXTURES

SECTION 224000

PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and related components.


1. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers floor drainsand specialty fixtures not in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people withdisabilities.

B. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in thisSection include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains andtailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are included where indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances,equipment, and supports and indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, andflow-control rates for each type of fixture indicated.

B. Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each categorythrough one source from a single manufacturer.

1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a singlemanufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.


PLUMBING FIXTURES

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and UsableBuildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336,"Americans with Disabilities Act"; about plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

D. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," forfixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

E. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.

F. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures:

1. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M.2. Hand Sinks: NSF 2 construction.3. Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M.4. Stainless-Steel Fixtures Other Than Service Sinks: ASME A112.19.3M.5. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.6. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.

G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneousfittings:

1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1M.3. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.4. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.5. Tubular Brass Drainage Fittings and Piping: ASME A112.18.1M.

H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneouscomponents:

1. Floor Drains: ASME A112.21.1M.2. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446.3. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.4. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.5. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.6. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.7. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate roughing-in and final plumbing fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can be installedto comply with original design and referenced standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements indicated herein and in the appendix, provideplumbing fixtures and trim of one of the following for each type of fixture or trim:

1. Plumbing Fixtures:


PLUMBING FIXTURES

a. American Standard; U.S. Plumbing Products.b. Crane Co.c. Eljer Plumbingware Div.; Household International Co.d. Kohler Co.e. Sherle Wagner International.f. Universal-Rundle Corp.g. Sloan

2. Stainless Steel Sinks:

a. American Standard; U.S. Plumbing Products.b. Elkay Mfg. Co.c. Just Mfg. Co.d. Moen; Div. of Stanadyne.e. Advance Tabco

3. Mop Basins:

a. Aquarius Industries, Inc.b. Bradley Corp.c. Eljer Plumbingware Div.; Household International Co.d. Fiat Products.e. Florestone Products Co., Inc.f. Kohler Co.g. Mobility Plush. Stern-Williams Co., Inc.i. Acorn

4. Faucets and Plumbing Trim:

a. American Standard; U.S. Plumbing Products.b. Delta Faucet Co.; Div. of Masco Corp.c. Elkay Mfg. Co.d. Kohler Co.e. Leonard Valve Co.f. Sloan Valve Co.g. Symmons Engineering Co.h. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.

5. Flush Valves:

a. Sloan Valve Co.b. Watrous Flush Valve Co.c. American Standard.

6. Water Closet Seats:

a. Bemis Mfg. Co.b. Beneke Corp.c. Forbes-Wright Industries, Inc.; Church Products.d. Olsonite Corp.; Olsonite Seats.e. Comfort Seats

7. Water Coolers:


PLUMBING FIXTURES

a. Ebco Mfg. Co.b. Elkay Mfg. Co.c. Filtrine Manufacturing Co.d. Stern Williams.e. White-Westinghouse Water Coolers.f. Acorn

8. Wash Fountains:

a. Acorn Engineering.b. Bradley Corporation.c. Intersan Manufacturing Company.d. Willoughby

9. Fixture Supports:

a. Kohler Co.b. Tyler Pipe.c. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.

2.2 PLUMBING FIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Provide plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, other components, and supports as specified in theAppendix, following Part 3 of this Section.

2.3 FAUCETS

A. Faucets General Unless otherwise specified, provide faucets that are cast brass with polishedchrome-plated finish.

2.4 FITTINGS, EXCEPT FAUCETS

A. Fittings General: Unless otherwise specified, provide fittings fabricated of brass, with a polishedchrome plated finish.

B. Fittings installed concealed inside a plumbing fixture or within wall construction may be withoutchrome plate finish.

C. Escutcheons: Polished chrome-plated, sheet steel wall flange with friction clips or set-screw.

D. Deep Pattern Escutcheons: Wall flange with set screw or sheet steel wall flange with friction clips,of depth adequate to conceal protruding roughing-in fittings.

2.5 FLUSHOMETERS

A. Provide flushometers compatible with fixtures, with features and of consumption indicated.

B. Construction: Cast-brass body, brass or copper pipe or tubing inlet with wall flange and tailpiece withspud, screwdriver check stop, vacuum breaker, and brass lever handle actuation except where othervariations are specified. Type shall be diaphragm operation except where other type is specified.


PLUMBING FIXTURES

C. Finish: Exposed metal parts shall be polished chrome-plated, except components installed in aconcealed location may be rough brass or unfinished.

2.6 TOILET SEATS

A. General: Provide toilet seats compatible with water closets, and of type, color, and features indicated.

2.7 PLUMBING FIXTURE SUPPORTS

A. Supports: ASME A112.6.1M, categories and types as required for wall-hanging fixtures specified, andwall reinforcement.

B. Support categories are:

1. Carriers: Supports for wall-hanging water closets and fixtures supported from wallconstruction. Water closet carriers shall have an additional faceplate and coupling whenused for wide pipe spaces. Provide tiling frame or setting gage with carriers forwall-hanging water closets.

2. Chair Carriers: Supports with steel pipe uprights for wall-hanging fixtures. Urinal chaircarriers shall have bearing plates.

3. Chair Carriers, Heavy Duty: Supports with rectangular steel uprights for wall-hangingfixtures.

4. Reinforcement: 2-inch by 4-inch wood blocking between studs or 1/4-inch by 6-inch steelplates attached to studs, in wall construction, to secure floor-mounted and special fixturesto wall.

C. Support Types: Provide support of category specified, of type having features required to matchfixture.

1. Provide supports specified as part of fixture description, in lieu of category and typerequirements above.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for potable cold water and hot water supplies and soil, waste, and vent pipingsystems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installing fixtures.

B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.

C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Install plumbing fixtures and specified components, in accordance with designations and locationsindicated on Drawings.

B. Install supports for plumbing fixtures in accordance with categories indicated, and of type required.


PLUMBING FIXTURES

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturers' written installationinstructions, roughing-in drawings, and referenced standards.

B. Install floor-mounted, floor-outlet water closets with closet flanges and gasket seals.

C. Install wall-hanging, back-outlet urinals with gasket seals.

D. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate whensupports are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is indicated.

E. Fasten floor-mounted fixtures and special fixtures having holes for securing fixture to wallconstruction, to reinforcement built into walls.

F. Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls.

G. Fasten counter-mounting-type plumbing fixtures to casework.

H. Secure supplies behind wall or within wall pipe space, providing rigid installation.

I. Set shower receptors and mop basins in leveling bed of cement grout.

J. Install stop valve in an accessible location in each water supply to each fixture.

K. Install trap on fixture outlet except for fixtures having integral trap.

L. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and withincabinets and millwork. Use deep pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipefittings.

M. Seal fixtures to walls, floors, and counters using a sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, siliconesealant in accordance with sealing requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." Matchsealant color to fixture color.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other sections of Division 22. The Drawings indicategeneral arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connectionrequirements:

1. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbingequipment specified in other sections of Division 22.

2. Install piping connections indicated between appliances and equipment specified in othersections, direct connected to plumbing piping systems.


A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units are waterpressurized. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure untilall units operate properly.


PLUMBING FIXTURES

3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, andcontrols.

B. Operate and adjust disposers, hot water dispensers, and controls. Replace damaged andmalfunctioning units and controls.

C. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, electric water coolers, and faucets, shower valves, andflushometers having controls, to provide proper flow and stream.

D. Replace washers of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

E. Clean fixtures, fittings, and spout and drain strainers with manufacturers' recommended cleaningmethods and materials.

F. Review the data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "ProjectCloseout."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing by the Owner.

3.8 FIXTURE SCHEDULE

A. Provide plumbing fixtures as scheduled in PART 4 of this Section.


PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 4 - APPENDIX TO SECTION 22 4000

4.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM

A. General: Fixture catalog names and numbers used herein are American Standard unless otherwisespecified. Refer to plans/schedules for fixture rough-in requirements and locations. Mount all fixturesper architect elevations.

B. P-1 Water Closets:

1. Madera 3451, floor mounted vitreous china, siphon jet, top spud, elongated bowl, 15" rimheight, 1.28 gpf, white in color. Refer plans for locations.

2. Bemis No. 1655SSCT, solid plastic seat, extra heavy duty, open front less cover, stainlesssteel hinge posts and self-sustaining check hinge. Color: White.

3. Zurn ZTR6200EV-LL battery powered sensor operated flush valve, 1.28 gpf, 4 “AA”batteries, 10 year battery life.

C. P-1A H.C. Water Closets:

1. Madera 3461, floor mounted vitreous china, siphon jet, top spud, elongated bowl, 16-1/2"rim height, ADA, 1.28 gpf, white in color. Refer plans for locations.

2. Bemis No. 1655SSCT, solid plastic seat, extra heavy duty, open front less cover, stainlesssteel hinge posts and self-sustaining check hinge. Color: White.

3. Zurn ZTR6200EV-LL battery powered sensor operated flush valve, 1.28 gpf, 4 “AA”batteries, 10 year battery life.

D. P-2 Urinal:

1. Allbrook 6550, vitreous china, siphon jet urinal, 0.5 gpf, stainless steel strainer, top spud,trap. Refer plans for locations and mounting heights.

2. Zurn ZTR6203-EWS-LL battery powered flush valve, 0.5 gpf, 4 “AA” batteries, 10 yearbattery life.

3. Floor mounted wall support hanger.

E. P-3 Lavatory

1. Lucerne, 0356, 20-1/2" x 18-1/4" overall, vitreous china, single hole for faucet (confirm w/faucet requirements), front overflow, D-shaped bowl, self-draining deck with back and sidesplash shields.

2. Reliant 3 7385.000 single handle faucet, ADA with aerator and grid drain.3. Grid drain shall be 1-1/4" chrome plated cast brass strainer with overflow and brass lock

nut. Drain tailpiece shall be 17 gauge seamless brass tube and a minimum of 6" long. Griddrain shall be certified by CSA or other recognized testing authority and be marked withmanufacturer's name.

4. Lavatory supply kits shall include chrome plated all brass stops. Inlet shall be ½”, outletshall be 3/8". Supply kit shall be certified by recognized testing authority, marked withmanufacturer's name and comply with the SDWA (Safe Drinking Water Act) "No Lead"restrictions of ANSI NSF 61 , Sec. 9.

5. 1-1/4" P-trap, chrome plated cast brass, with cleanout, with 17 gauge seamless brassadjustable wall bend, cast brass nipple, cast brass slip nuts, no reducing washers. P-Trapshall be provided with shallow brass flange. P-Trap to have 2" water seal and rough-in


PLUMBING FIXTURES

complete, adapter extensions are not allowed. P-Trap shall be certified by CSA or otherrecognized testing authority and marked with manufacturer's name.

6. Provide protective insulation on P-trap and hot water supply per ADA requirements.

F. P-3A 2-Station Lavatory:

1. Bradley MG-2 Terreon Express Lavatory System, 2-station. ADA Compliant design withwall mount, stainless steel mounting, chrome plated fittings. Color by architect.

2. P-trap, tailpiece, two flexible stainless steel supply connections. 3. Thermostatic mixing valve with combination stop, strainer , and check valves.4. Sensor operated, battery power controls, individual solenoid valves.

G. P-4 4 Station Washfountain:

1. Bradley MF2949 Wall-Hung Quadra-Fount washfountain. ADA Compliant design, vandalresistant, solid surface material., color by architect.

2. Thermostatic mixing valve with combination stop, strainer, and check valves.3. Infrared sensor operated controls, individual solenoid valves, and 120/24 volt transformer.4. P-trap, tailpiece, two flexible stainless steel supply connections.

H. P-5 Hi-Lo Electric Water Cooler w/ Bottle Filler:

1. Elkay EZSTL8WS wall mounted water coolers, hi-lo, stainless steel bowl, bubbler, bottlefiller, barrier free access with easy touch controls on front, left and right sides of unit. Bottlefiller has touchless activation with auto 20-second shut-off. Bottle filler shall be on the lowerof the two coolers. Capacity 8 gph @ 50 degree F, 80 degree F entering water, 90 degreeF ambient, 370 watts, 5.0 FLA, 115/1/60, 140 lbs.

2. 3/8" supplies with ball valve isolation valves.3. Refer plans for locations and mounting heights.

I. P-5A Single Electric Water Cooler:

1. Elkay LZS8WS wall mounted water cooler, stainless steel construction, bowl, vandalresistant bubbler, barrier free access with with easy touch controls on front and side of unit.Bottle filler has touchless activation with auto 20-second shut-off and green ticker display.Capacity 8 gph @ 50 degree F, 80 degree F entering water, 80 degree F ambient, 370watts, 5.0 FLA, 115/1/60, 88 lbs.

2. 3/8" supplies with ball valve isolation valves.3. Refer plans for locations and mounting heights.

J. P-6 Mop Basin:

1. Fiat TSBC100 mop basin, terrazo, 24"x24" with stainless steel caps on all curbs.2. Fiat 830-AA supply with hose thread, and vacuum breaker.3. Fiat 832-AA 30", 5/8" hose with 3/4" brass coupling, and stainless steel hose bracket.4. Fist MSG2424 stainless steel wall guards.5. Fiat 1453-BB combination strainer and lint basket.

K. P-7 Classroom Sink w/ Bubbler:

1. Elkay DRKADR2220R, 22"x19-1/2" overall, ADA compliant, one bowl 16" x 13-1/2" x 6"deep, single compartment sink, fully sound insulated, self-rimming, 3 hole rear ledge, 8"centers, 1-hole right ledge, 18 gauge type 304 stainless steel, undercoated, polished to asatin finish.


PLUMBING FIXTURES

2. Elkay LK804, 8" handle centers, polished chrome, 5" reach, chrome plated lever handleswith hot and cold color indicators.

3. Elkay LK1141A push button bubbler, polished chrome, self closing, with built-in adjustablevolume control and flexible mouth guard.

4. 3/8" supplies with ball valve isolation valves. Provide protective insulation on P-trap andhot water supply per ADA requirements.

5. Off center 3-1/2" drain outlet for ADA compliance6. Strainers and tail pieces.

L. P-8 Art Room Sink:

1. Elkay LRADA2219 Single compartment sink, 22"x19-1/2" overall, 18"x14"x6" deep bowl,18 gauge, type 304 stainless steel, self-rimming, sound guard undercoating, off center 3-1/2" drain outlet for ADA compliance.

2. Zurn Z82300-HS single lever kitchen faucet, chrome plated, 10" swing spout, ceramic diskcartridge and temperature limit stop, hose and spray, 2.2 gpm, ADA compliant.

3. 3-1/2" drain with basket strainer stop.4. Plaster trap PT.5. Supply kits shall include chrome plated all brass stops. Inlet shall be ½”, outlet shall be

3/8". Supply kit shall be certified by recognized testing authority, marked withmanufacturer's name and comply with the SDWA (Safe Drinking Water Act) "No Lead"restrictions of ANSI NSF 61 , Sec. 9.

M. P-9 Shower:

1. Bradley HN250 barrier free, ADA compliant, individual wall show unit, with fixed direction,adjustable spray shower head, and an optional fixed head in lieu of the hand held wand.Provide pressure balanced mixing valve, 2.5 gpm flow and diverter valve. Cabinetconstruction 18 gauge type 304 stainless steel, polished to #4 finish, with vertical shroudto extend to above ceiling. Standard soap tray. Seat and grab bar by others.

2. Shower drain 2" equal to FD-A located as shown on the drawings.

N. P-9A ADA Shower:

1. Bradley HN250-2FS barrier free, ADA compliant, individual wall show unit, with fixeddirection, adjustable spray shower head, and an optional fixed head in lieu of the hand heldwand. Provide pressure balanced mixing valve, 2.5 gpm flow and diverter valve. Cabinetconstruction 18 gauge type 304 stainless steel, polished to #4 finish, with vertical shroudto extend to above ceiling. Stainless steel hose inlets, standard soap tray. Mount onehead four feet above finished floor, per ADA, the other six feet above floor, verify both perarchitect's plans and specifications. Seat and grab bar by others.

2. Shower drain 2" equal to FD-A located as shown on the drawings.

O. P-10 Triple Pot Sink:

1. Advance Tabco FE Series, model FE-3-1515-15LX, 18 gauge type 304 stainless steel, 9"high splash, 1-5/8" diameter tubular stainless steel legs and stainless steel gussets. Three15"x15" bowls 12" deep, 2" radius, 15" drain board left.

2. Heritage 7292.252 two-handled, splash-mount, 12" tubular swing spout, lever handles,ceramic disk valve cartridges, solid brass construction.

3. (2) 3-1/2" drain outlet, stainless steel body, conical strainer with push and lock stem andrubber stopper.

4. ½ HP disposer.5. 1-1/2" C.P. brass tailpieces.6. 1-1/2" drains combined to 2" with flow controller to grease trap as shown on plans.


PLUMBING FIXTURES

P. P-11 Washer Box:

1. Guy Gray painted steel box, white powder coat on cold rolled steel, w/ angle quarter turnvalves and center drain.

Q. P-12 Single Sink:

1. Elkay LRAD1919 Single compartment sink, 19"x19-1/2" overall, 16"x13-1/2"x6" deep bowl,18 gauge, type 304 stainless steel, self-rimming, sound guard undercoating, off center 3-1/2" drain outlet for ADA compliance.

2. Zurn Z82300-HS single lever kitchen faucet, chrome plated, 10" swing spout, ceramic diskcartridge and temperature limit stop, hose and spray, 2.2 gpm, ADA compliant.

3. 3-1/2" drain with basket strainer stop.4. ½ HP disposer.5. 1-1/2" CP P-trap.6. Supply kits shall include chrome plated all brass stops. Inlet shall be ½”, outlet shall be

3/8". Supply kit shall be certified by recognized testing authority, marked withmanufacturer's name and comply with the SDWA (Safe Drinking Water Act) "No Lead"restrictions of ANSI NSF 61 , Sec. 9.

R. P-13 Hand Sink

1. Lucerne, 0356.028, 20-1/2" x 18-1/4" overall, vitreous china, single hole for faucet (confirmw/ faucet requirements), front overflow, D-shaped bowl, self-draining deck with back andside splash shields.

2. Heritage 6832.352 8" gooseneck faucet with 4" wrist blade handles with hot/cold colorindicators, ADA with 1.5 gpm aerator.

3. Grid drain shall be 1-1/4" chrome plated cast brass strainer with overflow and brass locknut. Drain tailpiece shall be 17 gauge seamless brass tube and a minimum of 6" long. Griddrain shall be certified by CSA or other recognized testing authority and be marked withmanufacturer's name.

4. Lavatory supply kits shall include chrome plated all brass stops. Inlet shall be ½”, outletshall be 3/8". Supply kit shall be certified by recognized testing authority, marked withmanufacturer's name and comply with the SDWA (Safe Drinking Water Act) "No Lead"restrictions of ANSI NSF 61 , Sec. 9.

5. 1-1/4" P-trap, chrome plated cast brass, with cleanout, with 17 gauge seamless brassadjustable wall bend, cast brass nipple, cast brass slip nuts, no reducing washers. P-Trapshall be provided with shallow brass flange. P-Trap to have 2" water seal and rough-incomplete, adapter extensions are not allowed. P-Trap shall be certified by CSA or otherrecognized testing authority and marked with manufacturer's name.

6. Provide protective insulation on P-trap and hot water supply per ADA requirements.



COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

SECTION 230500


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.2. Dielectric fittings.3. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipeand duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavatedspaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.


C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperaturesand weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact bybuilding occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Transition fittings.2. Dielectric fittings.



A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural WeldingCode--Steel."



B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure VesselCode: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."



C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics maybe furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electricalservices, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratingsor efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.



B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress ofconstruction, to allow for HVAC installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete andother structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that areconcealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section"Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS










B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thicknessand chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.


A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint,plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180deg F.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.b. Central Plastics Company.c. Eclipse, Inc.d. Epco Sales, Inc.e. Hart Industries, International, Inc.f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

D. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain,threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Perfection Corp.b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.d. Victaulic Co. of America.

2.5 SLEEVES



C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends andintegral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION





B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of pipingsystems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviationsto layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.





G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roofslabs.


O. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

P. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-inrequirements.





D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threadsfull and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Joinpipe fittings and valves as follows:



1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry sealthreading is specified.


E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and weldingoperators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connectionto each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at finalconnection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials ofdissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect pipingmaterials of dissimilar metals.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are notindicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems andcomponents in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations.Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.5 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

SECTION 230529


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and equipment:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.2. Fastener systems.3. Pipe stands.


1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapezehangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for pipe hangers forfire-protection piping.

3. Division 23 Section(s) "Metal Ducts” for duct hangers and supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."


A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight ofsupported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipmentand connected systems and components.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.2. Fiberglass pipe hangers.3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.



4. Powder-actuated fastener systems.



A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."4. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."5. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.

B. Manufacturers:

1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc.2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports.3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.5. Empire Industries, Inc.6. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.8. Grinnell Corp.9. GS Metals Corp.10. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.11. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.12. PHS Industries, Inc.13. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.14. Tolco Inc.

C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.




2.3 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete withpull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials whereused.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Hilti, Inc.b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.d. MKT Fastening, LLC.e. Powers Fasteners.

2.4 PIPE STAND FABRICATION

A. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistantcomponents to support roof-mounted piping.

B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod-roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped cradleto support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

1. Manufacturers:

a. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.b. MIRO Industries.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink andnonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems andequipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in pipingsystem Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will nothave field-applied finish.



D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in directcontact with copper tubing.

E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified inpiping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated orinsulated stationary pipes, NPS ½ to NPS 30.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes,NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS ½ to NPS 4, to allow off-centerclosure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

4. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension ofnoninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS ½ to NPS 30.6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

G. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping systemSections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

H. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections,install the following types:

1. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joistconstruction to attach to top flange of structural shape.

2. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,channels, or angles.

3. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.4. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.5. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge.6. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.


A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports,clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operatorsthat are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according topowder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.



C. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and mount onsmooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.

D. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and otheraccessories.

E. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

F. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipedeflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building services piping)are not exceeded.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieveindicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1 inch or less.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas ofshop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections..

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and applygalvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

SECTION 230553


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipe Markers.2. Stencils

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaceswhere devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type, permanentadhesive.

1. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible.2. Data:

a. Name and plan number.b. Equipment service.

3. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches forequipment.

B. Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inchthick, engraved laminated plastic, with abbreviated termsand numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8-inch center hole for attachment.

1. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.



2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, andshowing direction of flow.

1. Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.2. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each

application length.3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers extending

360 degrees around pipe at each location.4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type pipe

markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label.5. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or

as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Markers: Precoiled semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe andto attach to pipe without adhesive.

C. Shaped Pipe Markers: Preformed semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipeand to attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate insulation vapor barrier.

D. Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back.

2.3 STENCILS

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door labels,equipment labels, and similar operational instructions.

1. Stencil Material: Aluminum.2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint may

be in pressurized spray-can form.3. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless

otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices,including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanicalequipment.

1. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,½ inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greaterviewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size ofprincipal lettering.



2. Data: Distinguish among multiple units and identify units.3. Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following general

categories of equipment:

a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous unitssuch as gas outlets.

b. Fire department hose valves.c. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units.d. Fuel-burning units, including boilers and furnaces.e. Pumps, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.f. Coils, evaporators, and similar equipment.g. Fans, blowers and primary balancing dampers.h. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.i. Tanks and pressure vessels.j. Strainers, filters, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.

B. Stenciled Equipment Marker Option: Stenciled markers may be provided instead of laminated-plasticequipment markers, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for properidentification because of distance from normal location of required identification.

C. Identify mechanical equipment with equipment markers in the following color codes:

1. Green: For cooling equipment and components.2. Yellow: For heating equipment and components.3. Orange: For combination cooling and heating equipment and components.4. Brown: For energy-reclamation equipment and components.

D. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, ½ inch forviewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances.Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

E. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety andemergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units.

F. Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels.

3.3 PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A. Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flowindication arrows showing direction of flow.

1. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Pretensioned pipe markers. Usesize to ensure a tight fit.

2. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Self-adhesive pipe markers. Usecolor-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 3/4 inch wide, lapped at least 1-1/2 inchesat both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.

3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Shaped pipe markers. Use sizeto match pipe and secure with fasteners.

4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Self-adhesive pipe markers. Usecolor-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches wide, lapped at least 3 inchesat both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.



B. Stenciled Pipe Marker Option: Stenciled markers may be provided instead of manufactured pipemarkers, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe markers with painted, color-coded bands orrectangles on each piping system.

1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

C. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine rooms;accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior nonconcealedlocations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures.4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment.7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced markers.

3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Stenciled Duct Label Option: Stenciled labels, showing service and flow direction, may be providedinstead of plastic-laminated duct labels, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high isneeded for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.

B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.



TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

SECTION 230593


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:

1. Air Systems: Constant-volume air systems.2. HVAC equipment quantitative-performance settings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fanspeed or adjust a damper.

B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, andterminals, according to indicated quantities.

C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high airvelocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from aperson's skin than is normally dissipated.

D. NC: Noise criteria.

E. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatableresults.

F. RC: Room criteria.

G. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.

H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that causereduced capacities in all or part of a system.

I. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fanwhen installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested.

J. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

K. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves thedistribution system.



L. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment.

M. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and reportingTAB procedures.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, onapproved forms certified by TAB firm.

B. Warranties specified in this Section.


A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by AABC, NEBB, or TABB.

B. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and

referenced in this Specification.

C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and BalancingHeating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems." or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing,Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems." or SMACNA's TABB "HVAC Systems - Testing,Adjusting, and Balancing."

D. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently ifrequired by instrument manufacturer.

1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and thename of party performing instrument calibration.


A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy the site and building during some TAB period dependingon contractor completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts withOwner's operations.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to supportand assist TAB activities.

B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have beensatisfactorily completed.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discoverconditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of Contract.2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells,

flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, arerequired by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancingdevices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system andequipment operation.

B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents."

D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions forenvironmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions aboutHVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data toProject conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired orunpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate systemeffect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditionsdifferent from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. Tocalculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans andSystems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6.Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.

G. Examine system and equipment test reports.

H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, suchas test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, andmanual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are accessible andappropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing.

J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased,belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, to verify that they are accessible and theircontrols are connected and functioning.

L. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.



M. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:

1. Dampers and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller.2. Dampers are in the position indicated by the controller.3. Integrity of dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully

open positions. This includes dampers in variable-air-volume terminals.4. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and

cold walls.5. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.6. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.7. Controller set points are set at indicated values.8. Interlocked systems are operating.9. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values.

N. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe andrecord system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicatedvalues.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.4. Balance dampers are open.5. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and

access to balancing devices is provided.6. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be

met.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained inAABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air ConditioningSystems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of EnvironmentalSystems" or SMACNA's TABB "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimumextent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, closeprobe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrierand finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.

C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identificationmaterial, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, andsimilar controls and devices, to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS



A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommendedtesting procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-airdampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.

L. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fanmanufacturer.

1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable andupstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as

possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions.

2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftopunit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.

a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnelmust change filters.

3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heatrecovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.

4. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipmentmanufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motoramperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, fullheating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum requiredbrake horsepower.



B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflowswithin specified tolerances.

1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjustvolume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tubetraverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculatethe total airflow for that zone.

2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjustsubmain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's writteninstructions and calculating factors.

D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances ofindicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampersat air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicatedquantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the ContractDocuments.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.2. Motor horsepower rating.3. Motor rpm.4. Efficiency rating.5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying fromminimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper operation. Recordobservations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Refrigerant Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.3. Airflow.4. Air pressure drop.5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.



3.8 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS

A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatictemperature-control system.

B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successiveeight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings.Measure when the building or zone is occupied.

C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.

3.9 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION

A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.

B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect controlfunctions.

C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.

D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).

E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.

F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions andcorrelate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes.

G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.

H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.

I. Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.

J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates ona grounded or nongrounded power supply.

K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.

3.10 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.

3.11 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in"Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices.Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performancemeasuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and generalconstruction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.



B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, proceduresin progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systemsbeing tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor forsystems serving multiple floors.

3.12 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in three-ringbinder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.

B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancingengineer.

1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:

1. Manufacturers' test data.2. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.3. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings and

Product Data.

D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the finalreport, as applicable:

1. Title page.2. Name and address of TAB firm.3. Project name.4. Project location.5. Architect's name and address.6. Engineer's name and address.7. Contractor's name and address.8. Report date.9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report.10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report.11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.b. Notable characteristics of systems.c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated values.

a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.b. Conditions of filters.c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.f. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.g. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.



E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present eachsystem with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.3. Terminal units.4. Balancing stations.5. Position of balancing devices.

F. Fan Coil Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. Unit identification.b. Location.c. Make and type.d. Model number and unit size.e. Manufacturer's serial number.f. Unit arrangement and class.g. Discharge arrangement.h. Number of filters, type, and size.

2. Motor Data:

a. Make and frame type and size.b. Horsepower and rpm.c. Volts, phase, and hertz.d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total airflow rate in cfm.b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.c. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.d. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.e. Coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.f. Outside airflow in cfm.g. Return airflow in cfm.h. Outside-air damper position.i. Return-air damper position.

G. Roof Top Unit Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

a. System identification.b. Location.c. Coil type.d. Number of rows/tubes.e. Make and model number.f. Circuiting arrangement.




a. Airflow rate in cfm.b. Average face velocity in fpm.c. Air pressure drop in inches wg.d. Water flow rate in gpm.e. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.f. Entering-water temperature in deg F.g. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.h. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.i. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig.j. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F.

H. Fan Test Reports for Energy Recovery Ventilators: For outside air and exhaust fans, include thefollowing:

1. Fan Data:

a. System identification.b. Location.c. Make and type.d. Model number and size.e. Manufacturer's serial number.f. Arrangement and class.g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.

2. Motor Data:

a. Make and frame type and size.b. Horsepower and rpm.c. Volts, phase, and hertz.d. Full-load amperage and service factor.e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.g. Number of belts, make, and size.


a. Total airflow rate in cfm.b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.c. Fan rpm.d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.

I. Round and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the ductcross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling unit number.b. Location and zone.c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.e. Duct size in inches.f. Duct area in sq. ft..g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm.



h. Indicated velocity in fpm.i. Actual airflow rate in cfm.j. Actual average velocity in fpm.

3.13 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly checkmeasurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balancereadings documented in the Final Report.

B. Final Inspection:

1. If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in thefinal report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as"FAILED."

2. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the totalmeasurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall beconsidered incomplete and shall be rejected.

3. TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final reportand balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final report.

4. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner shallcontract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and balancing inaccordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the finalpayment.

3.14 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balancedconditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winterconditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winterconditions.



HVAC DUCT INSULATION

SECTION 230700


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Insulation Materials:

a. Mineral fiber.b. Flexible Elastomericc. Fire rated blanket

2. Adhesives.3. Mastics.4. Sealants.5. Tapes.6. Securements7. Angles

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, andjackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-responsecharacteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing andinspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacketmaterials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markingsof applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed indexof 50 or less.




A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTMstandard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 23Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct Installerfor duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

E. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Complywith ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.b. Johns Manville; Microlite.c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.

F. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Complywith ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation withfactory-applied ASJ. For equipment applications, provide insulation with factory-applied ASJ.Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas.d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board.f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.

G. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534,Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.




a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.

H. Fire-Rated Blanket: High-temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that is UL testedand certified to provide a 2-hour fire rating

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bondinginsulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.



C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade Afor bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.



2.3 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply withMIL-C-19565C, Type II. Perform to LEED requirements for environmentally friendly mastics.

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services.


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35.b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90.c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50.d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590.e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40.f. Vimasco Corporation; 749.



2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry filmthickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.5. Color: White.

C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-30.b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-35.c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-25.d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 501.e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-10.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness.3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight.5. Color: White.

D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Encacel.b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 60-95/60-96.c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 570.d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-70.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness.3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F.4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight.5. Color: White.

E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-10.b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 35-00.c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-05/15.d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 550.e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50.f. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F.4. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight.5. Color: White.

2.4 SEALANTS

A. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:



1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.4. Color: White.5. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1-1/2 inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

B. Concealed, rectangular, supply-air and return duct insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

2.5 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835.b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105.c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ.d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches.3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.5. Elongation: 2 percent.6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827.b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111.c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK.d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches.3. Thickness: 6.5 mils.4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.5. Elongation: 2 percent.6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.


a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800.b. Compac Corp.; 120.c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF.



d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.e.

2. Width: 2 inches.3. Thickness: 3.7 mils.4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.5. Elongation: 5 percent.6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.

2.6 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:


a. Childers Products; Bands.b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands.c. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inchthick, 3/4 inch wide with wing or closed seal.

3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick,3/4 inch wide with wing or closed seal.

4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to acceptmetal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed forcapacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulationindicated.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following :

1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1.2) GEMCO; CD.3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD.4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.

2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fullyannealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depthof insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1.2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin.3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head.4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.

3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded toprojecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely inposition indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the followingrequirements:




1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series T.2) GEMCO; Perforated Base.3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.

b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inchessquare.

c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstratedcapability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated withoutdamaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

4. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inchthick,galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely inplace but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.2) GEMCO; R-150.3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.

b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert toensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.

2.7 CORNER ANGLES

A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784,Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.

B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14.

C. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel according toASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or 316.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and otherconditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that willadversely affect insulation application.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements forheat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact withstainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; freeof voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves,and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required foreach item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. For exposed piping in public space provide insulation finish suitable for painting. Painting is specifiedin Division, color by Architect. As an option to painting, PVC color jacketing shall be provided. Submitcolor sample to Architect for approval.

D. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Installaccessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or drystate.

E. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

F. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

G. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

I. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesiverecommended by insulation material manufacturer.

J. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

K. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taperand seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation toinsulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation materialmanufacturer.



4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields overjacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

L. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet anddry film thicknesses.

M. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.

Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinalseams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple lapswith outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer tomaintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and atends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.

N. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominalthickness.

O. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking dueto thermal movement.

P. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extendpatches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to buttjoints.

Q. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.2. Testing agency labels and stamps.3. Nameplates and data plates.4. Manholes.5. Handholes.6. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and

seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, installinsulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint withjoint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roofflashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.



B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuouslythrough wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and

seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, installinsulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint withjoint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Installinsulation continuously through walls and partitions.

D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuouslythrough penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleevesfor fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacentinsulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminateopenings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive

to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

3.6 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bandswithout deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusionswith vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps withoutward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staplelongitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulationmaterial manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:


2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections ofpipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulationmaterials with wire or bands.



C. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings andtransitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of verticalducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinalcenterline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. eachway, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to holdinsulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulationfacing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuousunbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints withinsulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure lapsto adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Installvapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic,and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintainvapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-footintervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shapedpattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times theinsulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. Atend joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section foreach surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually miteredgores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides ofstiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

D. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings andtransitions.



3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of verticalducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinalcenterline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. eachway, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to holdinsulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulationfacing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuousunbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints withinsulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure lapsto adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Installvapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic,and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintainvapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-footintervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shapedpattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times theinsulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.

5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section foreach surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and insideradius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individuallymitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides ofstiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

3.7 FINISHES

A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulationmanufacturer's recommended protective coating.



B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket andinsulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited



to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General"Article.

2. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-appliedjacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shallbe limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment InsulationSchedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determinecompliance.

C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection revealsnoncompliance with requirements.

3.9 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation, refer to Material Insulation Schedule on the drawings:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.3. Indoor, concealed return located in nonconditioned space.4. Indoor, exposed return located in nonconditioned space.5. Outdoor, concealed supply and return.6. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code andASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.4. Flexible connectors.5. Vibration-control devices.6. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

3.10 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Refer to Material and Insulation Schedule on the drawings for insulation requirements.

B. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for eachpiping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selectionfrom materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.b. Mineral-Fiber Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

D. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.



E. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.2. Underground piping.3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.



FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

SECTION 231123


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.2. Piping and tubing joining materials.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipeand duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavatedspaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.


C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperaturesand weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Piping specialties.2. Escutcheons.


C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according toAWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler andPressure Vessel Code.




A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas pipingaccording to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage,and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damagingcoating, and protect from direct sunlight.


A. Perform site survey to verify locations of existing piping within building for connection and service tothis expansion.

B. Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural-gas service to facilities occupiedby Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging toprovide purging and startup of natural-gas supply according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of natural-gasservice.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind finishedsurfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding.3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and

threaded ends.4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including

bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

a. Material Group: 1.1.b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe.c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground.d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings, and

spiral-wound metal gaskets.



e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steelunderground.

B. PE Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11.

1. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket type or ASTM D 3261, butt type with dimensionsmatching ASTM D 2513, SDR 11, PE pipe.

C. Transition Fittings: Manufactured pipe fitting with one PE pipe end for heat-fusion connection to PEpipe and with one ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, steel pipe end for threaded connection to steelpipe.

D. Components, Tapes, Gaskets, and Bolts and Nuts: Suitable for natural gas and as recommendedby piping manufacturer.


A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wallthickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.3 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig (862 kPa).2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for

valves 1 inch (25 mm) and smaller.6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) to NPS 2 (DN 50) shall have initials "WOG"

permanently marked on valve body.

B. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.


a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company.b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.



7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff ValveSchedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

8. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa).9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

C. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.


a. Lee Brass Company.b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.3. Plug: Bronze.4. Ends: Threaded, socket, as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve

Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.6. Pressure Class: 125 psig (862 kPa).7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.8. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.


A. Dielectric Unions:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.b. Central Plastics Company.c. Hart Industries International, Inc.d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.e. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.f. Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig.3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials.4. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas.5. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint, plain,

or welded end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Dielectric Flanges:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.b. Central Plastics Company.c. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.d. Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.



2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig.3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials.4. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas.5. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint, plain,


C. Dielectric-Flange Kits:


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. Calpico Inc.c. Central Plastics Company.d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig.3. Companion-flange assembly for field assembly.4. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or PE bolt

sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.5. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas.6. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint, plain,


2.5 SLEEVES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, withplain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping connectionsbefore equipment installation.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.

B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to the International Fuel Gas Code to determine that natural-gasutilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.

C. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.



3.3 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of pipingsystems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layoutare approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install underground, natural gas distribution piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade.

D. Install underground, PE, natural gas distribution piping according to ASTM D 2774.

E. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progressof construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

F. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms andservice areas.

G. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right anglesor parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

H. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

I. Locate valves for easy access.

J. Install piping free of sags and bends.

K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

L. Install escutcheons at penetrations of interior walls, ceilings, and floors.

M. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

N. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-inrequirements.

O. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, includingservice-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install wherecondensate is subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and samesize as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.

P. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protectiondevices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

Q. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors,and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.

R. Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural-gas piping andpiping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of steel pipe with welded jointsas described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment conduit to outdoors and terminate withweatherproof vent cap.



1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may beinstalled in accessible spaces without containment conduit.

2. In Floors: Install natural-gas piping with welded or brazed joints and protective coating incast-in-place concrete floors. Cover piping to be cast in concrete slabs with minimum of1-1/2 inches of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other metallicstructures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not embed pipingin concrete slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate.

3. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from physicaldamage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports.

a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require strikerbarriers.

4. Prohibited Locations:

a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trashchutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevatorshafts.

b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions.

S. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

T. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

U. PE-to-Steel Piping Connections: Transition fitting.

V. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each pieceof equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.

W. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.


A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing orcopper connector.

B. Install underground valves with valve boxes.

C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate forservicing and testing.


A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe.



4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless drysealthreading is specified.


D. Welded Joints:

1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and weldingoperators.

2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds

and where damage to coating occurs during construction.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter.

F. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas service.Install gasket concentrically positioned.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Division 23 Section "Hangersand Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, ½ inch.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment groundingconductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

B. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

C. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances orequipment.

D. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical toinlet of each appliance.

3.8 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" forpiping and valve identification.






1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to the International Fuel Gas Code andauthorities having jurisdiction.

C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.



METAL DUCTS

SECTION 233113

METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings..2. Single-wall round and flat-oval ducts and fittings.3. Sheet metal materials.4. Duct liner.5. Sealants and gaskets.6. Hangers and supports.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, andbalancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices,duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.


A. Static-Pressure Classes:

a. Supply Ducts (except in Mechanical Rooms): 1-inch wg.b. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg.c. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg.

B. Leakage Class:

a. Round Supply-Air Duct: 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg.b. Rectangular Supply-Air Duct: 6 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg.c. Flexible Supply-Air Duct: 6 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners and adhesives.2. Sealants and gaskets.


METAL DUCTS



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct ConstructionStandards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for static-pressure class,applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions inSMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC DuctConstruction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular Ducts,"for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals,and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types andfabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealingrequirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVACDuct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressureclass unless otherwise indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offeringproducts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, thefollowing:

a. Lindab Inc.b. McGill AirFlow LLC.c. SEMCO Incorporated.d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct ConstructionStandards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for static-pressureclass, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisionsin SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.


METAL DUCTS

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC DuctConstruction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct and Fittings," forstatic-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, andother provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinalseams.

2. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with butt-weldedlongitudinal seams.

D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct ConstructionStandards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "ConicalTees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-supportintervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal andFlexible."

2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methodsunless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks,stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with oiled, mattefinish for exposed ducts.

D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2D finish for concealed ducts andsatin finish for exposed ducts.

E. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts andstandard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

2.4 DUCT LINER

A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and withNAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."


a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group.b. Johns Manville.c. Knauf Insulation.d. Owens Corning.e. Maximum Thermal Conductivity:


METAL DUCTS

1) Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F meantemperature.

2) Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature.

2. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form theinterior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating.Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPAfor use in HVAC systems.

B. Natural-Fiber Duct Liner: 85 percent cotton, 10 percent borate, and 5 percent polybinding fibers,treated with a microbial growth inhibitor and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.


a. Bonded Logic, Inc.b. Reflectix Inc.

2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.24 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F meantemperature when tested according to ASTM C 518.

3. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximumsmoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84; certified by an NRTL.

4. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying withNFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

C. Round Ducts Liner: High performance, preformed liner for inside diameters of 8 to 26 inches equalto Johns Manville Spiracoustic preformed round liner. Snap-in liner for duct diameters 27 thru 72inches, equal to Johns Manville Spiracoustic Plus liner board. Thickness, density, thermal, and firehazard performance as indicated in sections above. Other properties include:

1. Maximum air velocity, 6000 fpm, and UL tested for at least 2 times this velocity.2. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA Standard 90A and ASTM C 916. Use adhesives equal

to the Johns Manville Superseal coating products, and as recommended by the linermanufacturer.

3. Other Standards: ATSM G21 and G22, NFPA 90B, ASHRAE 62-89, ISO 9000 Certified.

D. Insulation Pins and Washers:

1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fullyannealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depthof insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.

2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thickgalvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in placebut not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

E. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metaland Flexible," Figure 2-19, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."

1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesivecoverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layersof duct liner is prohibited.

2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metalnosing.

3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.


METAL DUCTS

4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edgeoverlapping.

5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary.

6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm.7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding

12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18inches longitudinally.

8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that haveeither channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facingsat the following locations:

a. Fan discharges.b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than

2500 fpm or where indicated.

9. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turningvane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or otherbuildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws,rivets, or welds.

2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gasketsshall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 whentested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/siliconeactivator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

2. Tape Width: 4 inches.3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.4. Water resistant.5. Mold and mildew resistant.6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.7. Service: Indoor and outdoor.8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum.

C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.4. Water resistant.5. Mold and mildew resistant.6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum sheets.


METAL DUCTS

D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.2. Type: S.3. Grade: NS.4. Class: 25.5. Use: O.

E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall berated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods withthreads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal andFlexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum HangerSizes for Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

E. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and boltsdesigned for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

F. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible withduct materials.

G. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system.Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculatefriction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install ductsystems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and CoordinationDrawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"unless otherwise indicated.


METAL DUCTS

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branchconnections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular tobuilding lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanentenclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms andenclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view,cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of samemetal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Complywith requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials.

3.2 RANGE HOOD EXHAUST DUCTS, SPECIAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install ducts to allow for thermal expansion through 2000 deg F temperature range.

B. Install ducts without dips or traps that may collect residues unless traps have continuous or automaticresidue removal.

C. Install access openings at each change in direction and at intervals defined by NFPA 96; locate onsides of duct a minimum of 1-1/2 inches from bottom; and fit with grease-tight covers of same materialas duct.

D. Do not penetrate fire-rated assemblies except as permitted by applicable building codes.

3.3 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

A. Seal duct seams and joints for duct static-pressure and leakage classes specified in "PerformanceRequirements" Article, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal andFlexible," Table 1-2, "Standard Duct Sealing Requirements," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Seal Classes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"Table 1-2, "Standard Duct Sealing Requirements."

1. For static-pressure classes 1- and ½-inch wg, comply with SMACNA's "HVAC DuctConstruction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Seal Class C, except as follows:

a. Ducts that are located directly in zones they serve.


METAL DUCTS

b. Ducts that have short runs from volume control boxes to diffusers.c. Return-air ceiling plenums.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4,"Hangers and Supports."

B. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes forRound Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of eachelbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

D. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts,sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet.

E. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, andshear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air DuctAccessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outletand inlet, and terminal unit connections.



B. Leakage Tests:

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual."2. Test the following systems:

a. Supply air.

3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testingand for compliance with test requirements.

4. Test for leaks before insulation application.5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section

being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at maximumsystem design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operatingpressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

C. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.


METAL DUCTS

3.7 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Liner:

1. Supply- and Return-Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, see schedule for thickness.2. Outdoor Return-Air and Fan Plenum: Fibrous glass, see schedule for thickness.3. Transfer Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick.

B. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metaland Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio.2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and VaneRunners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal andFlexible," Figure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "MiteredElbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionatelyfewer segments.

1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segmentsfor 90-degree elbow.

2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for90-degree elbow.

3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segmentsfor 90-degree elbow.

C. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metaland Flexible," Figure 2-6, "Branch Connections."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.

2. Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees." Saddle tapsare permitted in existing duct.

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.


METAL DUCTS

c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.



AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

SECTION 233300


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.2. Manual volume dampers.3. Control dampers.4. Fire Dampers.5. Turning vanes.6. Flexible connectors.7. Flexible ducts.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Source quality-control reports.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenancemanuals.


A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and withNFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptablematerials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheetmetal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and otherimperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.



1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

C. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealedducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inchminimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering productsthat may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.3. Greenheck Fan Corporation.4. Nailor Industries Inc.5. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.6. Ruskin Company.

B. Description: Gravity balanced.

C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm.

D. Maximum System Pressure: 1-inch wg.

E. Frame: 0.052-inchthick, galvanized sheet steel with welded corners and mounting flange.

F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center-pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, 0.025-inchthick,roll-formed aluminum with sealed edges.

G. Blade Action: Parallel.

H. Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl, mechanically locked.

I. Blade Axles:

1. Material: Nonferrous metal.2. Diameter: 0.20 inch.

J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

L. Bearings: Steel ball.

M. Accessories:

1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.3. Electric actuators.



4. Chain pulls.5. Front of rear screens.6. 90-degree stops.

N. Sleeve: Minimum 20-gage thickness.

2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

1. Standard leakage rating.2. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.3. Frames:

a. Hat-shaped, galvanize-steel channels, 0.064-inch minimum thickness.b. Mitered and welded corners.c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

4. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade.b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.

5. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

6. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

2.4 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.2. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc.3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc4. Greenheck Fan Corporation5. Nailor Industries Inc6. NCA Manufacturing, Inc7. Pottorff.8. Prefco; Perfect Air Control, Inc.9. Ruskin Company.10. Vent Products Company, Inc.11. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

C. Type: Dynamic rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.

D. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm velocity.



E. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours.

F. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream or Multiple-blade type, fabricated with roll-formed,0.034-inch thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

G. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness 0.138 inch or 0.39 inch thick, as required, and of length to suitapplication.

2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of perimetermounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must comply withsleeve requirements.

H. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

I. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlockingblades, use full-length, 0.034-inch thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.

J. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.

K. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable 165 deg F rated, fusible links.

2.5 TURNING VANES


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.2. Duro Dyne Inc.3. METALAIRE, Inc.4. SEMCO Incorporated.5. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with barsperpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated facesand fibrous-glass fill.

C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal andFlexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

D. Vane Construction: Single wall.

E. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger dimensions.

2.6 FLEXIBLE DUCTS




1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.2. McGill AirFlow LLC.3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steelwire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.

C. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound,spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg negative.2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F.

2.7 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap andgasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suitduct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline andgrease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct ConstructionStandards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass DuctConstruction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories ingalvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, andaluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fanunless otherwise indicated.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend fromlarger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hatchannels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Coordinate subparagraphs below with Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."Install steel volumedampers in steel ducts.

2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.



F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment"to indicate the purpose of access door.

H. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

I. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with loadedvinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

J. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct. Donot use flexible ducts to change directions.

K. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed.3. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.4. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and damper.



DIFFUSER, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

SECTION 233713

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; andperformance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location,quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CEILING DIFFUSERS

A. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers:


a. Krueger.b. METALAIRE, Inc.c. Nailor Industries Inc.d. Price Industries.e. Titus.f. Tuttle & Bailey.

2. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows with size, mounting andpattern as indicated on drawings.

3. Material: Aluminum.4. Finish: Baked enamel, white.

B. Louver Face Diffuser:




a. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company.b. METALAIRE, Inc.c. Nailor Industries Inc.d. Price Industries.e. Titus.f. Tuttle & Bailey.

2. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.3. Material: Aluminum.4. Finish: Baked enamel, white..

2.2 REGISTERS AND GRILLES

A. Adjustable Bar Register:


a. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company.b. Krueger.c. METALAIRE, Inc.d. Nailor Industries Inc.e. Price Industries.f. Titus.g. Tuttle & Bailey.

2. Material: Aluminum.3. Finish: Baked enamel, white.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Methodof Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance withrequirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.


3.2 INSTALLATION



A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, andaccessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for airvolume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated,as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel.Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determinationof final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service andmaintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, beforestarting air balancing.


237200 - 1Western Heights Public Schools New West Grandstand Rebid2014 Project No. N13012 ER

AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS

SECTION 237200


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Packaged energy recovery units.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories.



A. Source Limitations: Obtain air-to-air energy recovery units through one source from a singlemanufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air-to-air energyrecovery units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "ProductRequirements."

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except withArchitect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory datato Architect for review.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intendeduse.

D. ASHRAE Compliance: Capacity ratings for energy recovery devices shall comply with ASHRAE 84,"Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers."

E. NRCA Compliance: Roof curbs for roof-mounted equipment shall be constructed according torecommendations of NRCA.



1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items arespecified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Filters: Furnish one set of each type of filter specified.2. Fan Belts: Furnish one set of belts for each belt-driven fan in energy recovery units.3. Wheel Belts: Furnish one set of belts for each heat wheel.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PACKAGED ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturersspecified.

1. Greenheck2. ClimaCool3. SEMCO Incorporated.4. Loren Cook

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Unit shall be fully assembled at the factory and consist of an insulated metal cabinet, outdoor airintake with metal mesh filter assembly, condensate drain pan, P trap, Energy wheel,compressedrefrigerant coils, packaged DX system, indirect gas furnace, motorized dampers, motorizedrecirculating damper, sensors, curb assembly, service receptacle, filter assembly for intake air andexhaust air, supply air blower assembly, exhaust air blower and an electrical control center. Allspecified components and internal accessories factory installed and tested and prepared forsingle-point high voltage connection.

2.3 CABINET

A. Materials: Formed double wall insulated metal cabinet, fabricated to permit access to internalcomponents for maintenance.

1. Outside casing: 18 gauge, galvanized (G90) steel meeting ASTM A653 for components thatdo not receive a painted finish. Pre-painted components as supplied by the factory shallhave polyester urethane paint on 18 gauge G60 galvanized steel.



2. Internal assemblies: 18 gauge, galvanized (G90) steel except for motor supports whichshall be minimum14 gauge galvanized (G90) steel. Inner wall of double wall constructionshall be minimum 24 gauge G90 steel.

B. Cabinet Insulation: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B and erosion requirements of UL 181.

1. Materials: Fiberglass insulation. If insulation other than fiberglass is used, it must also meetthe Fire Hazard Classification shown below.

a. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm)b. Fire Hazard Classification: Maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of

50, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 411.c. Location and application: Full coverage of entire cabinet exterior to include walls,

roof and floor of unit. Insulation shall be of semi-rigid type and installed betweeninner and outer shells of all cabinet exterior components.

C. Access panels / doors: Unit shall be equipped with insulated, hinged doors or removable accesspanels to provide easy access to all major components. Doors and access panels shall be fabricatedof 18 gauge galvanized G90 steel.

D. Condensate drain pan: Pan shall be formed of welded austenitic stainless steel sheet material andprovided with a welded drain connection at the front for connection to a P trap. Drain pan shall besloped in two directions to provide positive draining.

E. P trap: An engineered P trap (condensate drain) assembly shall be provided for each unit, to includecleanout ports, cleanout tool, vacuum break device and see-through reservoir to permit visualverification of water or glycol solution levels.

F. Energy wheel: Energy wheel shall be of total enthalpy, rotary air-to-air type and shall be an elementof a removable energy wheel cassette. The cassette shall consist of a galvanized steel framework(designed to produce laminar air flow through the wheel), an energy wheel as specified and a motorand drive. The wheel media shall be a polymer film matrix in a stainless steel framework and becomprised of individual segments that are removable for servicing. Non-segmented energy wheelsare not acceptable. Silica gel desiccant shall be permanently bonded to the polymer film and isdesigned and constructed to permit cleaning and servicing. The energy wheel is to have a five yearwarranty. Performance criteria are to be as specified in AHRI Standard 1060, complying with theCombined Efficiency data in the submittal.

G. Compressed refrigerant coils shall be AHRI Certified and shall be (silver) soldered or brazed into thecompressed refrigerant system. Coil shall be constructed of copper tubing, permanently bonded toaluminum fins and enclosed in a galvanized steel frame. If two compressors are used as componentsof a packaged DX system in the unit, then the evaporator coil shall be of "interlaced" configuration,permitting independent operation of either compressor without conflict with the other compressor.

H. Supply Air and Exhaust Air blower assemblies: Blower assemblies consist of an electric motor asspecified and a belt driven blower. Assembly shall be mounted on heavy gauge galvanized rails andfurther mounted on 1.125 inch thick neoprene vibration isolators.

I. Control panel / connections: unit shall have an electrical control center where all high and low voltageconnections are made. Control center shall be constructed to permit single-point high voltage powersupply connections.

J. Indirect Gas Furnace:



1. ETL Certified as a component of the unit.2. Integral combustion gas blower capable of exhausting flue gases thru external flue piping.3. ETL Certified for installation downstream of a cooling coil.4. Fault sensors to provide fault conditions to optional digital controller or building controls.5. 4-pass tubular heat exchangers, constructed of type 409 stainless steel. Heat exchanger

tubes shall be installed on the vest plate by means of swaged assembly, weldedconnections are not acceptable. Heat exchanger tubes shall be supported by a minimumof two fabricated assemblies that support the tubes and also permit expansion andcontraction of the tubes.

6. Heat exchanger shall have a 10 year extended warranty.7. Furnace control shall be 4:1 Modulating.8. Casing: Weather-tight metal housing with intake air vents. Large, metal lift-off door shall

provide easy access to the enclosed vest plate, control circuitry, gas train, burner assemblyand exhaust blower.

9. Solid state controls permitting stand-alone operation or control by building controllers.10. Include kit for basic indoor venting as indicated on the drawings.

K. Motorized dampers: Exhaust Air and Intake Air motorized dampers of insulated low leakage type shallbe factory installed.

L. Motorized Recirculating Air Damper designed to permit 100% recirculation of exhaust air shall befactory installed where scheduled. Damper shall be controlled by 2-position switch controlled bybuilding automation system. Coordinate installation of unit with controls contractor. RecirculatingAir option is only used during unoccupied periods.

M. Sensors are considered to be part of various optional operational modes or device controllers and areto be factory supplied and installed.

N. Curb Assembly: A curb assembly made of 14 gauge galvanized steel shall be provided by the factoryfor assembly and installation as part of this division. The curb assembly shall provide perimetersupport of the entire unit and shall have duct adapter(s) for supply air and return air. Curb assemblyshall enclose the underside of the unit and shall be sized to fit into a recess in the bottom of the unit.Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with roofing contractor to ensure curb unit is properlyflashed to provide protection against weather/moisture penetration. Contractor shall provide andinstall appropriate insulation for the curb assembly.

O. Service receptacle: 120 VAC GFCI service outlet shall be factory-provided and installed.

2.4 BLOWER

A. Blower section construction, Supply Air and Exhaust Air: Belt drive motor and blower shall beassembled onto a 14 gauge galvanized steel platform and must have neoprene vibration isolationdevices.

B. Blower assemblies: Shall be statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuousoperation at maximum rated fan speed and horsepower.

C. Centrifugal blower housing: Formed and reinforced steel panels to make curved scroll housing withshaped cutoff.



D. Forward curved blower (fan) wheels: Galvanized or aluminum construction with inlet flange andshallow blades curved forward in direction of airflow. Mechanically attached to shaft with set screws.

E. Blower performance shall be factory tested for flow rate, pressure, power, air density, rotation speedand efficiency. Ratings are to be established in accordance with AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods ofTesting Fans for Rating".

2.5 MOTORS

A. General: Blower motors greater than ¾ horsepower shall be "NEMA Premium™" unless otherwiseindicated. Compliance with EPAct minimum energy-efficiency standards for single speed ODP andTE enclosures is not acceptable. Motors shall be heavy-duty, permanently lubricated type to matchthe fan load and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Drives shall be sized for aminimum of 150% of driven horsepower and pulleys shall be fully machined cast-type, keyed and fullysecured to the fan wheel and motor shafts. Electric motors of ten horsepower or less shall be suppliedwith an adjustable drive pulley.

B. Motor voltages and sizes shall be as indicated on the drawing schedule.

2.6 UNIT CONTROLS

A. The unit shall be constructed so that it can function as a stand-alone heating and cooling systemcontrolled by factory-supplied controllers, thermostats and sensors. This unit shall be controlled bya factory-installed microprocessor programmable controller (DDC) that is connected to varioussensors.

B. Unit shall incorporate a DDC controller with integral LCD screen that provides text readouts of status,operating settings and alarm conditions. DDC controller shall have a built-in keypad to permit operatorto access read-out screens and change settings without the use of ancillary equipment, devices orsoftware. DDC controllers that require the use of equipment or software that is not factory-installedin the unit are not acceptable. Alarm readouts consisting of flashing light codes are not acceptable.Owner-specified ventilating conditions can be input by means of pushbuttons.

C. Operating protocol: The DDC shall be factory-programmed for LonWorks. Coordinate allrequirements with BAS provider.

D. Sensors

1. Dirty Filter Sensor2. Temperature Sensors: as required for unit operation. See controls section for input passed

thru at the Lon interface.3. Pressure Sensor- Outside air fan, return air fan4. Rotation Sensor

2.7 FILTERS

A. Unit shall have permanent metal filters located in the outdoor air intake and shall be accessible fromthe exterior of the unit. 2" MERV 8 disposable pleated filters shall be provided in the intake air streamand 2" MERV 8 filters in the exhaust air stream.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate generalarrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tighteningvalues. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A andUL 486B.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspectfield-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections.Report results in writing.

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm propermotor rotation and unit operation.

2. Adjust seals and purge.3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.4. Set initial temperature and humidity set points.5. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.

3.4 START-UP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to perform startup service. Clean entire unit, combcoil fins as necessary, and install clean filters. [Verify water source for compliance with manufacturer’srequirements for flow and temperature]. Measure and record electrical values for voltage andamperage. Refer to Division 23 “Testing, Adjusting and Balancing” and comply with provisions therein.

B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,operate, and maintain units. Refer to Division 1 Sections.



PACKAGED ROOF TOP UNITS

SECTION 237414


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged, outdoor, central-station air-handling units (rooftop units) with thefollowing components and accessories:

1. Direct-expansion cooling.2. Gas furnace.3. Economizer outdoor- and return-air damper section.4. Integral, space temperature controls.5. Roof curbs.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct-digital controls.

B. ECM: Electrically commutated motor.

C. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the outdoor-air stream to reject heat during coolingoperations and to absorb heat during heating operations. "Outdoor air" is defined as the air outsidethe building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the system.

D. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant-Coil Fan: The outdoor-air refrigerant-coil fan in RTUs. "Outdoor air" isdefined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated throughthe system.

E. RTU: Rooftop unit. As used in this Section, this abbreviation means packaged, outdoor,central-station air-handling units. This abbreviation is used regardless of whether the unit ismounted on the roof or on a concrete base on ground.

F. Supply-Air Fan: The fan providing supply air to conditioned space. "Supply air" is defined as theair entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.

G. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the supply-air stream to absorb heat (provide cooling)during cooling operations and to reject heat (provide heating) during heating operations. "Supplyair" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each RTU, including rated capacities,dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.


C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For RTUs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenancemanuals.

D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. ARI Compliance:

1. Comply with ARI 210/240 and ARI 340/360 for testing and rating energy efficiencies forRTUs.

2. Comply with ARI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs.

B. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigeration system safety.2. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils.3. Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 for minimum efficiency of heating and cooling.

C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked forintended use.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replacecomponents of RTUs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Packaged units shall have a five-year parts warranty on the compressors and heatexchangers. In addition, the entire unit, excluding refrigerant, will have a 12-month partswarranty from date of shipment not to exceed 18 months from date of shipment

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Lennox2. Carrier Corporation.3. York International Corporation.



4. Trane

2.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION:

A. Units furnished and installed shall be combination two-stage gas heating and two-stage coolingpackaged rooftops as scheduled on contract documents and these specifications. Units shall havetwo stage compressors, a variable speed supply fan and two-speed condenser fan. They shall befactory-assembled, piped, wired and fully charged with refrigerant. Cooling capacity ratings shallbe based on ARI Standard 210/240. Units shall consist of an insulated, weather-tight casing withcompressor(s), air-cooled condenser coil, condenser fans, evaporator coil, return-air filters, supplymotors, unit controls and gas-fired heating section.

2.3 CASING

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: Formed and reinforced double-wall insulatedpanels, fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints betweensections sealed.

B. Exterior Casing Material: Galvanized steel with factory-painted finish, with pitched roof panels andknockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connections and lifting lugs.

1. Exterior Casing Thickness: 0.052 inch thick.

C. Inner Casing Fabrication Requirements:

1. Inside Casing: Galvanized steel, 0.034 inch thick, perforated 40 percent free area.

D. Casing Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I.2. Thickness: ½ inch.3. Liner materials shall have air-stream surface coated with an erosion- and

temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric.4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

E. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of galvanized-steel sheet, a minimum of 2 inches deep,and complying with ASHRAE 62.

1. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation and seal moisturetight.

2. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple both sides of drain pan.

2.4 FANS AND MOTORS

A. Evaporator fan shall be capable of operating at variable speeds for enhanced humidity control andreduced temperature variation in the heating mode

B. Enhanced Dehumidification - hot-gas reheat.

C. During the heating mode, the supply airflow shall be modulated per the schedule below to providereduced zone temperature variation and lower unit sound levels.



D. Outdoor condenser fans shall be two-speed, direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced andbe configured in a draw-through arrangement.

2.5 COILS

A. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil:

1. Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type verticaldistributor.

2. Condensate Drain Pan: Galvanized steel with corrosion-resistant coating formed with pitchand drain connections complying with ASHRAE 62.

2.6 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS

A. Compressor: Minimum two-stage reciprocating compressors, mounted on vibration isolators; withinternal overcurrent and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heater.

B. Refrigeration Specialties:

1. Refrigerant Charge: R-410A.2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.3. Refrigerant filter/dryer.4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch.5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch.6. Minimum off-time relay.7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload.8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines.

2.7 AIR FILTRATION

A. Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV)according to ASHRAE 52.2.

1. Glass Fiber: Minimum 80 percent arrestance, and MERV 5.

2.8 GAS FURNACE

A. Completely assembled and installed two-stage heating system shall be integral to unit, UL or CSAapproved specifically for outdoor applications for use downstream from refrigerant cooling coils.Threaded gas connection on the unit may be connected internally with a straight-in pipe coupling.

B. The gas heat shall operate in two stages as called upon by the control system. The indoor airflowis modulated to match the lower heat output and the outdoor air damper is repositioned to maintainminimum ventilation setting.

C. Heat Exchanger: Provide aluminized steel tubes all heat exchangers shall have minimum 5-yearparts warranty.

D. Venting: Gravity vented with vertical extension if required by local code authority.



E. Safety Controls:

1. Gas Control Valve: Two stage.2. Gas Train: Single-body, regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly containing pilot

solenoid valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff.

2.9 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTION

A. Provide for single connection of power to unit with filed mounted disconnect switch accessible fromoutside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in overcurrent protection.

2.10 CONTROLS

A. Unit Controls: Solid-state control board and components contain at least the following features:

1. Indoor fan on/off delay.2. Default control to ensure proper operation after power interruption.3. Service relay output.4. Unit diagnostics and diagnostic code storage.5. Field-adjustable control parameters.6. Economizer control.7. Gas valve delay between first- and second-stage firing.8. Indoor-air quality control with carbon dioxide sensor.9. Low-ambient control, allowing operation down to 0 deg F.10. Minimum run time.11. Night setback mode.12. Return-air temperature limit.13. Low-refrigerant pressure control.

B. Thermostat: By controls contractor.

2.11 ACCESSORIES

A. Coil guards of painted, galvanized-steel wire.

B. Hail guards of galvanized steel, painted to match casing.

2.12 ROOF CURBS

A. Materials: Galvanized steel with corrosion-protection coating, watertight gaskets, andfactory-installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards. Full perimeter of unit and energyrecovery module, sloped to match roof slope.

1. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

a. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I or II.b. Thickness: 1 inch.



2. Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surfaceof curb.

a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment,

mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner whenapplied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet.

c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air-stream surface coated with atemperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabricdepending on service air velocity.

d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

B. Curb Height: 14 inches.

C. Wind and Seismic Restraints: Metal brackets compatible with the curb and casing, painted to matchRTU, used to anchor unit to the curb, and designed for loads at Project site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirementsfor installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of RTUs.

B. Examine roughing-in for RTUs to verify actual locations of piping and duct connections beforeequipment installation.

C. Examine roofs for suitable conditions where RTUs will be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure, level and secure, according to NRCA's "Low-Slope MembraneRoofing Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop Air Handling Unitsand Ducts." Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roofconstruction specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Secure RTUs to upper curb rail,and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest roofdrain or area drain.

B. Install piping adjacent to RTUs to allow service and maintenance.

1. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section "Facility Natural-GasPiping" Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with union andshutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.



C. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate thegeneral arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb.2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under

entire roof curb.3. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 23 Section

" Air Duct Accessories."4. Install return-air duct continuously through roof structure.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Reportresults in writing.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspectcomponents, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assistin testing. Report results in writing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units forcompliance with requirements.

2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper

motor rotation and unit operation.4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do thefollowing:

1. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing.2. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber.3. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, coils, and fans.4. Inspect internal insulation.5. Verify that labels are clearly visible.6. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.7. Verify that controls are connected and operable.8. Verify that filters are installed.9. Clean condenser coil and inspect for construction debris.10. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris.11. Connect and purge gas line.12. Remove packing from vibration isolators.13. Verify lubrication on fan and motor bearings.



14. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and binding.15. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.16. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.

a. Start refrigeration system.b. Do not operate below recommended low-ambient temperature.c. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.

17. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences.18. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer.19. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing. Adjust burner for

peak efficiency.

a. Measure gas pressure on manifold.b. Inspect operation of power vents.c. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber.d. Measure flue-gas temperature at furnace discharge.e. Perform flue-gas analysis. Measure and record flue-gas carbon dioxide and oxygen

concentration.f. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing rate

and when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air.

20. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits.21. Inspect outdoor-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers.22. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following when ambient is a minimum

of 15 deg F above return-air temperature:

a. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.b. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.c. Outdoor-air, dry-bulb temperature.d. Outdoor-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.

23. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following:

a. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures.b. Short circuiting of air through condenser coil or from condenser fans to outdoor-air

intake.

24. Verify operation of remote panel including pilot-light operation and failure modes. Inspect thefollowing:

a. High-temperature limit on gas-fired heat exchanger.b. Low-temperature safety operation.c. Filter high-pressure differential alarm.d. Economizer to minimum outdoor-air changeover.e. Relief-air fan operation.f. Smoke and firestat alarms.

25. After startup and performance testing and prior to Substantial Completion, replace existingfilters with new filters.

3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING



A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to twovisits to site during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

B. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing RTU and air-distributionsystems, clean filter housings and install new filters.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel toadjust, operate, and maintain RTUs. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."



SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS

SECTION 238126


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat pump units consisting of separateevaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed orconcealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each unit indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outletvelocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electricalcharacteristics.

B. Operation and maintenance data.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked forintended use.

B. Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy EfficientDesign of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."

C. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy EfficientDesign of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."

D. Units shall be designed to operate with HCFC-free refrigerants.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replacesplit-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials and workmanship within five years from dateof Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



2.2 GAS-FIRED FURNACES, CONDENSING


1. Trane2. Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corp.3. Lennox Industries Inc.4. York.

B. Description: Factory assembled, piped, wired, and tested; complying with ANSI Z21.47, "Gas-FiredCentral Furnaces," and NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code"; and bearing label of American GasAssociation.

C. Cabinet: Steel, with interior insulation around heat exchanger. Lift-out panels expose burners andall other items requiring access for maintenance.

1. Interior Insulation: Mineral-fiber board thermal insulation manufactured with glass fibers aminimum of ½ inch thick, bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612,Type IB, with aluminum foil jacket.

D. Finish of External Casings and Cabinets: Factory painted, manufacturer's standard color.

E. Fan: Centrifugal, factory balanced, resilient mounted, direct drive.

F. Type of Gas: Natural.

G. Heat Exchanger: Stamped and welded.

1. Primary: Aluminized steel.2. Secondary: Polyethylene-coated steel.

H. Burner Controls: Solid state; control gas valve and ignition.

1. Gas Valve: 24 V, 100 percent safety gas shutoff, pressure regulator, and manual shutoff.2. Ignition: Electronic pilot ignition, with electric spark igniter.

I. Automatic Controls: Solid-state board delays fan start and shutdown.

J. Accessories:

1. Combination Combustion-Air Intake and Vent: PVC plastic fitting to combine combustion-airinlet and vent through outside wall or roof as indicated.

2. Filter Media cabinet for 1" throw away air filter.

K. Other Features: See drawing schedule for additional requirements, including, but not limited toefficiency, staging, capacity and electrical characteristics.

2.3 EVAPORATOR UNIT

A. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying withARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve, encased coil to match furnace unit.

B. See section above FURNACES for fan components.



2.4 CASSETTE OR WALL-MOUNTING, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS


1. LG (min-splits only)2. Mitsubishi Electric Sales Canada, Inc. (min-splits only)3. Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc.; HVAC Division. (min-splits only)4. Sanyo Fisher (U.S.A.) Corp. (min-splits only)

B. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by Architect,and discharge drain pans with drain connection.

C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying withARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.

D. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal fan.

E. Filters: Permanent, cleanable.

2.5 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER UNIT

A. Casing steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holesfor water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gageports on exterior of casing.

B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed scroll type with crankcase heater and mounted on vibrationisolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, startcapacitor, relay, and contactor..

1. Refrigerant Charge: R-407C or R-410A.

C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying withARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.

D. Heat Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature air cut-off thermostat.

E. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.

F. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.

G. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F.

2.6 CONTROLS

A. Control Transformer: 24-V ac output, factory installed, and wired in furnace.

B. Cooling Relay: To start condensing unit.

C. Blower Fan Control: Staged, low-medium heating and high-speed cooling.

D. Power wiring is specified in "Conductors and Cables." Signal and control wiring are specified in"Control/Signal Transmission Media."



2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Thermostat, Cassette units only: Programmable, electronic; with heating setback and cooling setupwith seven-day programming, with the following features:

1. Touch sensitive keyboard.2. Automatic switching.3. Deg F readout.4. LED indicators.5. Hour/day programming.6. Manual override capability.7. Time and operational mode readout.8. Status indicator.9. Battery backup.10. Subbase with manual system switch (on-heat-auto-cool) and fan switch (auto-on).11. Fan-proving switch to lock out unit if fan fails.12. Control voltage transformers as required. Provide electrical circuits to spare breakers as

required.

B. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securelyfastened to building structure.

B. Install roof-mounted, compressor-condenser components on equipment rails and supports,compatible with the building roofing system.

C. Install ground-mounted compressor-condenser components on 4-inchthick, reinforced concretebase; 4 inches larger on each side than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specifiedin Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.

3.2 FURNACE INSTALLATION

A. Install gas-fired furnaces and associated fuel and vent features and systems according to NFPA 54.

B. Base-Mounted Units: Secure units to substrate. Provide optional bottom closure base if requiredby installation conditions.

C. Suspended Units: Suspend from structure using threaded rods, spring hangers, and buildingattachments. Secure rods to unit hanger attachments. Adjust hangers so unit is level and plumb.

D. Controls: Install thermostats and humidistats at mounting height of 60 inches above floor.

3.3 CONNECTIONS



A. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allowaccess to unit.

B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment according to "Grounding and Bonding."

D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tighteningvalues. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A andUL 486B.

E. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicategeneral arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

F. Connect gas piping according to Division 23 Section "Fuel Gas Piping."

G. Vent Connection, Noncondensing, Gas-Fired Furnaces: Connect Type B vents to noncondensingfurnace vent connection and extend outdoors.

H. Vent and Outside-Air Connection, Condensing, Gas-Fired Furnaces: Connect plastic piping ventmaterial to furnace connections and extend outdoors. Terminate vent outdoors with a cap and inan arrangement that will protect against entry of birds, insects, and dirt.

1. Plastic pipe joint construction is specified in Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materialsand Methods."

I. Connect ducts according to Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."

J. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

K. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

L. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tighteningvalues. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A andUL 486B.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspectfield-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in fieldtesting. Report results in writing.

B. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until noleaks exist.

C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motorrotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new components, and retest.

D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls andequipment.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION



A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel toadjust, operate, and maintain units. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."



DIVISION 26, 27 AND 28 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of ContentsDivision Section Title Pages

SPECIFICATIONS GROUP

Facility Services Subgroup

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL260500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 4260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND

CABLES 5260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 4260533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 7260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 7260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 5262413 SWITCHBOARDS 11262416 PANELBOARDS 8262726 WIRING DEVICES 6262813 FUSES 4262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 5262913 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 4264313 TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE

ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 5265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 5265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 4

DIVISION 28 - COMMUNICATIONS275116 SOUND REINFORCEMENT 10

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY283111 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 12


COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL SECTION 260500

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation.2. Sleeves for raceways and cables.3. Sleeve seals.4. Grout.5. Common electrical installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduceheadroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to otherinstallations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of

obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete,masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfacesor otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "AccessDoors and Frames."



D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specifiedin Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plainends.


C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side morethan 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and 1or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

2.2 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregategrout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a30-minute working time.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit forwall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange andinstall components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with theserequirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components ofboth electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitatefuture disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.



3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrateconcrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formedopenings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assembliesunless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor orwall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 4 inches above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable,unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposedsurfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve andraceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply withrequirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants.".

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, andfloors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetrationsleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "PenetrationFirestopping."

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexibleboot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves andmechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipeand sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeveseals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cablematerial and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve



seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts againstpressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installationsto restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installationrequirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."


260519 - 1


LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 260519

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Field quality-control test reports.



B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they areconstructed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

260519 - 2



2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering productsthat may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.3. General Cable Corporation.4. Senator Wire & Cable Company.5. Southwire Company.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN.

D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for armored cable, Type AC[metal-clad cable,Type MC Type SO and Type USE with ground wire.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.4. 3M; Electrical Products Division.5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, andclass for application and service indicated.

2.3 SLEEVES FOR CABLES



C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inchthickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specifiedin Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

260519 - 3



A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRINGMETHODS

A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, singleconductors in raceway.

C. Feeders in Cable Tray: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

D. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors inraceway.

E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductorsin raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

G. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

H. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

I. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used mustnot deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximumpulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will notdamage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, andfollow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification forElectrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

260519 - 4



A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tighteningvalues. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A andUL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent orbetter mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least [6 inches] [12 inches] of slack.


A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specifiedin Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."



D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches,thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equalto, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assembliesunless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor orwall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeveseal is to be installed.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve andcable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Division 07Section "Joint Sealants."

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, andfloors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to Division 07Section "Penetration Firestopping."

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing unitsapplied in coordination with roofing work.

260519 - 5



M. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeveseals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installingmechanical sleeve seals.

N. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves toallow for 1-inch annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeveseals.


A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material andsize. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annularspace between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elementsto expand and make watertight seal.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore originalfire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.


1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETAAcceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used.2. Test results that comply with requirements.3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.


260526 - 1


GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260526

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding featuresspecified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Ground rods.2. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.


D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include the following in emergency, operation,and maintenance manuals.



B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required byapplicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Grounding Bus: Rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 2 inches in cross section, unlessotherwise indicated; with insulators.

260526 - 2



2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations ofconductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, withat least two bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer formaterials being joined and installation conditions.

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by10 feet in diameter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No.6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feederswith isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, withalternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands ofyellow.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.2. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and othercommunication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in racewayfrom grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, andcentral equipment location.

1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate groundingconductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bus.

2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.

3.3 INSTALLATION

260526 - 3



A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwiseindicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may besubjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, exceptwhere routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate anyadjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install sovibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connectionis required, use a bolted clamp.

C. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, frombuilding's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrancesto building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a boltedclamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug boltsof the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductoron street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor ateach end.

2. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoffvalve.

D. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors ofassociated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond acrossflexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

E. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner columnand at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have beenenergized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance levelis specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. Make tests at ground rodsbefore any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitationand without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage orseepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing naturalground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

260526 - 4



1. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 3 ohm(s).

C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architectpromptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.


260533 - 1


RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260533

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.

C. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

D. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

E. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

F. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

G. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

H. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

I. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures,and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,and attachments to other work.

C. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items areshown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

D. Source quality-control test reports.

260533 - 2






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.2. Alflex Inc.3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.5. Electri-Flex Co.6. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.7. Maverick Tube Corporation.8. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal.9. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. IMC: ANSI C80.6.

D. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

E. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.

F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

G. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1;listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in whichinstalled.

1. Fittings for EMT: Steel or die-cast, set-screw or compression type.

H. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, andcompounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhancetheir conductivity.

2.2 METAL WIREWAYS


260533 - 3



1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.2. Hoffman.3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwiseindicated.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-downstraps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for completesystem.

D. Wireway Covers: As indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.2. EGS/Appleton Electric.3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.4. Hoffman.5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division.6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal.7. RACO; a Hubbell Company.8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division.10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

E. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, galvanized, cast iron with gasketedcover.

F. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front,finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.3. Key latch to match panelboards.4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.4 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS

260533 - 4





2.5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.2. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wetlocations.

4. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.5. Raceways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical Fiber or Communications

Cable: EMT.6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic in

damp or wet locations.

B. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

C. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unlessotherwise indicated.

D. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum racewaysare installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 exceptwhere requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for ElectricalSystems."

260533 - 5



E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listedcompound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compoundmanufacturer's written instructions.

H. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not lessthan 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

I. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them withlisted sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with ablank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install racewaysealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

J. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed andsemirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; andfor transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

K. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, andinstall box flush with surface of wall.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trenchbottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches innominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of

conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction astemperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit toprovide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inchesof finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling withnormal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at buildingentrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ductsthroughout the length of the elbow.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encasecoupling with 3 inches of concrete.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduithorizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Installinsulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

260533 - 6



5. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits,placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of conduit.


A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specifiedin Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."



D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 ormore sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assembliesunless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor orwall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway unlesssleeve seal is to be installed.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve andraceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, andfloors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply withDivision 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type flashingunits applied in coordination with roofing work.

M. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeveseals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve forinstalling mechanical sleeve seals.


A. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations.

260533 - 7



B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material andsize. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annularspace between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealingelements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore originalfire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specifiedin Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets arewithout damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by

manufacturer.


260553 - 1


IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260553

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceway and metal-clad cable.2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable.3. Underground-line warning tape.4. Warning labels and signs.5. Instruction signs.6. Equipment identification labels.7. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in theContract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation andMaintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Useconsistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaceswhere devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

260553 - 2



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Description: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, polyethylene tape.

1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick.2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.4. Printed legend shall indicate type of underground line.

2.2 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels,configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwiseindicated.

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, withcolors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.

D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetatebutyrate signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size requiredfor application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.

E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OFELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."

2.3 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. in.and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.

2.4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transferor equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide aweatherproof and ultraviolet-resistant seal for label.

260553 - 3



C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letterson a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. Whiteletters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

E. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be1inch.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb, minimum.3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.

B. Paint: Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

1. Exterior Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry):

a. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coat(s) over a primer.

1) Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer.2) Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.

2. Exterior Concrete Unit Masonry:

a. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coat(s) over a block filler.

1) Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.2) Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.

3. Exterior Ferrous Metal:

a. Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coat(s) over a primer.

1) Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer.2) Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss alkyd enamel.

4. Exterior Zinc-Coated Metal (except Raceways):

a. Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: One finish coat over a primer.

1) Primer: Exterior zinc-coated metal primer.2) Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss alkyd enamel.

5. Interior Concrete and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry):

a. Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: One finish coat over a primer.

1) Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer.

260553 - 4



2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel.

6. Interior Concrete Unit Masonry:

a. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: One finish coat over a block filler.

1) Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.

7. Interior Gypsum Board:

a. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: One finish coat over a primer.

1) Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.

8. Interior Ferrous Metal:


1) Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer.2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.

9. Interior Zinc-Coated Metal (except Raceways):


1) Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer.2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.

C. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machinescrews with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and BranchCircuits More Than 30 A: Identify with orange self-adhesive vinyl label.

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables of Auxiliary Systems: Identify the following systems withcolor-coded, self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands:

1. Fire Alarm System: Red.2. Fire-Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow.3. Combined Fire Alarm and Security System: Red and blue.4. Security System: Blue and yellow.5. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue.6. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow.7. Control Wiring: Green and red.

260553 - 5



C. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three branchcircuits in same junction or pull box, use color-coding conductor tape. Identify each ungroundedconductor according to source and circuit number.

D. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, signal,sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pullpoints. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used bymanufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, andOperation and Maintenance Manual.

E. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply with29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self-adhesive warning labels. Identify system voltage with black letterson an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipmentincluding, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches.b. Controls with external control power connections.

2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwiseindicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similarequipment in finished spaces.

F. Instruction Signs:

1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenanceof electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approvedlegend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

2. Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs with white legend on a redbackground with minimum 3/8-inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipmentused for power transfer.

G. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label thatis consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Applylabels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels,control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting,control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided withits own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label with clear protective overlay. Unless otherwiseindicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- highlabel; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

260553 - 6



a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.c. Disconnect switches.d. Enclosed circuit breakers.e. Contactors.f. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.g. Voice and data cable terminal equipment.h. Master clock and program equipment.i. Intercommunication and call system master and staff stations.j. Television/audio components, racks, and controls.k. Fire-alarm control panel and annunciators.l. Monitoring and control equipment.m. Terminals, racks, and patch panels for voice and data communication and for signal

and control functions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewingwithout interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials andmethods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to thelocation and substrate.

F. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall completelyencircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side.Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximumintervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

G. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Leve] Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listedbelow for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.

1. Color shall be factory applied or, for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG if authorities havingjurisdiction permit, field applied.

2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Black.b. Phase B: Red.c. Phase C: Blue.

3. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Brown.b. Phase B: Orange.c. Phase C: Yellow.

4. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimumdistance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply

260553 - 7



last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoidobscuring factory cable markings.

H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor orcable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

I. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-linewarning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes wherewidth of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.

J. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 09 painting Sections.


260923 - 1


LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES SECTION 260923

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices:

1. Outdoor photoelectric switches.2. Indoor occupancy sensors.3. Lighting contactors.


1. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy sensors,and manual light switches.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy sensors,and manual light switches.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. PIR: Passive infrared.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.

1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.


D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, andmaintenance manuals.


260923 - 2




1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetratesceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors,fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TIME SWITCHES

2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicatedon Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following compatible with Siemens controlsystem:

1. Area Lighting Research, Inc.; Tyco Electronics.2. Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company.3. Intermatic, Inc.4. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.5. Novitas, Inc.6. Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls.7. Square D; Schneider Electric.8. TORK.9. Touch-Plate, Inc.10. Watt Stopper (The).

B. Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800-VA tungsten or 1000-VA inductive,to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with UL 773A.

1. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levelswithin that range.

2. Time Delay: 15-second minimum, to prevent false operation.3. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor, complying with IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE C62.41.2, and

IEEE 62.45 for Category A1 locations.4. Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEE C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or

stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky exposure.

2.3 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS


1. Hubbell Lighting.

260923 - 3



2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.3. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.4. Novitas, Inc.5. RAB Lighting, Inc.6. Sensor Switch, Inc.7. TORK.8. Watt Stopper (The).

B. General Description: Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit.

1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and offwhen unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum rangeof 1 to 15 minutes.

2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A.Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.

3. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungstenat 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150-mA,Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.

4. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical

enclosure.c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged

door.

5. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operationof the sensor.

6. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.7. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; keep lighting off when selected

lighting level is present.

C. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling or wall mounting; detect occupancy by using a combination of PIRand ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular technology or combination oftechnologies that controls on-off functions shall be selectable in the field by operating controls onunit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inchminimum movement of any portion of a

human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of averagesize and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner atan approximate speed of 12 inches/s.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular areaof 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

2.4 LIGHTING CONTACTORS


1. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation.2. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a division of Emerson Electric Co.3. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products.

260923 - 4



4. GE Industrial Systems; Total Lighting Control.5. Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company.6. Hubbell Lighting.7. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.8. MicroLite Lighting Control Systems.9. Square D; Schneider Electric.10. TORK.11. Touch-Plate, Inc.12. Watt Stopper (The).

B. Description: Electrically operated and electrically held, combination type with, complying withNEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.

1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, includingtungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less totalharmonic distortion of normal load current).

2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the pointof installation.

3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250.4. Provide with control and pilot devices as indicated on Drawings, matching the NEMA type

specified for the enclosure.

2.5 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG.Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors andCables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smallerthan No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical PowerConductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller thanNo. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical PowerConductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 95 percent coverage of areas indicated.Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions. Provide addtionalsensors as required to meet 95% coverage.

3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION

A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads, to eliminate structure-bornevibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators.

260923 - 5



3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors andCables." Minimum conduit size shall be 0.75 inch.

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limitedconductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unlessotherwise indicated.

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction,pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identificationfor Electrical Systems."

1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each

sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized,adjust and test for compliance with requirements.

2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays.

B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit occupied conditions. Provide up to two visitsto Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel toadjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices and lighting control system. Refer toDivision 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."


262413 - 1


SWITCHBOARDS

SWITCHBOARDS SECTION 262413

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less.2. Transient voltage suppression devices.3. Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.4. Instrumentation.5. Control power.6. Accessory components and features.7. Identification.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltagesuppression device, ground-fault protector, accessory, and component indicated. Includedimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics,ratings, accessories, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearancesand service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipmentfeatures, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.4. Detail short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices.5. Include descriptive documentation of optional barriers specified for electrical insulation and

isolation.6. Detail utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility company.7. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.8. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.9. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective

device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; includeselectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

262413 - 2


SWITCHBOARDS

10. Include diagram and details of proposed mimic bus.11. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified material and finish, for color selection.

D. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used.2. Test results that comply with requirements.3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emergency,operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components.2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.3. Time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device

included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectableranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers qualified as defined in NEMA PB 2.1 and trainedin electrical safety as required by NFPA 70E.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, andaccessories from single source from single manufacturer.

D. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchboardsincluding clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply withindicated maximum dimensions.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, bya qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

F. Comply with NEMA PB 2.

G. Comply with NFPA 70.

H. Comply with UL 891.


A. Deliver switchboards in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.

262413 - 3


SWITCHBOARDS

B. Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NECA 400 or NEMA PB 2.1.


A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and structures toprovide pathway for moving switchboards into place.

B. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install switchboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet workin spaces is complete and dry, work above switchboards is complete, and temporary HVACsystem is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions atoccupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwiseindicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F.b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

C. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 2, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.

D. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied byOwner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging toprovide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electricservice.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect's written permission.4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction thatpenetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors andpanels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-boltinserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified inDivision 03.

1.8 WARRANTY

262413 - 4


SWITCHBOARDS

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replacetransient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warrantyperiod.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective coveringfor storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Potential Transformer Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,but no fewer than two of each size and type.

2. Control-Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, butno fewer than two of each size and type.

3. Fuses and Fusible Devices for Fused Circuit Breakers: Equal to 10 percent of quantityinstalled for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

4. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,but no fewer than three of each size and type.

5. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for eachsize and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

6. Indicating Lights: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but nofewer than one of each size and type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide <Insert manufacturer'sname; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

C. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboards:

1. Main Devices: Panel mounted.2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted.3. Sections front and rear aligned.

D. Front- and Side-Accessible Switchboards:

1. Main Devices: Fixed, individually mounted.2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted.3. Sections front and rear aligned.

262413 - 5


SWITCHBOARDS

E. Front- and Rear-Accessible Switchboards:

1. Main Devices: Fixed, individually mounted.2. Branch Devices: Panel and fixed, individually mounted.3. Sections front and rear or rear aligned.

F. Nominal System Voltage: 480Y/277 V.

G. Main-Bus Continuous: See Plans.

H. Indoor Enclosures: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1.

I. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish overa rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.

J. Outdoor Enclosures: Type 3R.

1. Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard color; undersurfaces treated withcorrosion-resistant undercoating.

2. Enclosure: Flat roof; rear hinged doors for each section, with provisions for padlocking.3. Doors: Personnel door at each end of aisle, minimum width of 30 inches; opening outwards;

with panic hardware and provisions for padlocking.4. Accessories: Fluorescent lighting fixtures, ceiling mounted; wired to a three-way light switch

at each end of aisle; ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) duplex receptacle; emergencybattery pack lighting fixture installed on wall of aisle midway between personnel doors.

K. Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections.

L. Utility Metering Compartment: Fabricated, barrier compartment and section complying with utilitycompany's requirements; hinged sealed door; buses provisioned for mounting utility company'scurrent transformers and potential transformers or potential taps as required by utility company. Ifseparate vertical section is required for utility metering, match and align with basic switchboard.Provide service entrance label and necessary applicable service entrance features.

M. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switchboard.

N. Removable, Hinged Rear Doors and Compartment Covers: Secured by standard bolts, for accessto rear interior of switchboard.

O. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blankcompartments.

P. Pull Box on Top of Switchboard:

1. Adequate ventilation to maintain temperature in pull box within same limits as switchboard.2. Set back from front to clear circuit-breaker removal mechanism.3. Removable covers shall form top, front, and sides. Top covers at rear shall be easily

removable for drilling and cutting.4. Bottom shall be insulating, fire-resistive material with separate holes for cable drops into

switchboard.5. Cable supports shall be arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support cables

indicated, including those for future installation.

262413 - 6


SWITCHBOARDS

Q. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated.

1. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, withtin-plated aluminum or copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.

2. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Tin-plated, high-strength, electrical-grade aluminum alloywith tin-plated aluminum circuit-breaker line connections.

3. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity or tin-plated,high-strength, electrical-grade aluminum alloy.

4. Load Terminals: Insulated, rigidly braced, runback bus extensions, of same material asthrough buses, equipped with mechanical or compression connectors for outgoing circuitconductors. Provide load terminals for future circuit-breaker positions at full-ampere ratingof circuit-breaker position.

5. Ground Bus: Minimum-size required by UL 891, hard-drawn copper of 98 percentconductivity, equipped with mechanical connectors for feeder and branch-circuit groundconductors. For busway feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to buswayground connection and support cable at intervals in vertical run.

6. Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length ofswitchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends.

7. Neutral Buses: 50 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated,equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace busextensions for busway feeder neutral bus.

8. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated,equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace busextensions for busway feeder neutral bus.

9. Isolation Barrier Access Provisions: Permit checking of bus-bolt tightness.

R. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, andappurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment.

S. Bus-Bar Insulation: Factory-applied, flame-retardant, tape wrapping of individual bus bars orflame-retardant, spray-applied insulation. Minimum insulation temperature rating of 105 deg C.

T. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and othercomponents including instruments and instrument transformers.

2.2 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meetavailable fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads,and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip settingfor circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted,field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug orfield-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip.b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

262413 - 7


SWITCHBOARDS

4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings lessthan NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

5. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-stylefuse listed for use with circuit breaker; trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fusecompartment door.

6. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-faultprotection (6-mA trip).

7. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection(30-mA trip).

8. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

material.c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID)lighting circuits.

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickupand time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

e. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlockingground-fault protection function.

f. Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted communication module withfunctions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specifiedin Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

g. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 or 75percent of rated voltage.

h. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage withoutintentional time delay.

i. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimiccircuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.

j. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shallbe removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

2.3 INSTRUMENTATION

A. Instrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, NEMA EI 21.1, and the following:

1. Potential Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 120 V, 60 Hz, single secondary; disconnecting typewith integral fuse mountings. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connectedmetering and relay devices.

2. Current Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 5 A, 60 Hz, secondary; wound type; single secondarywinding and secondary shorting device. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent withconnected metering and relay devices.

3. Control-Power Transformers: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for units largerthan 3 kVA.

4. Current Transformers for Neutral and Ground-Fault Current Sensing: Connect secondarywiring to ground overcurrent relays, via shorting terminals, to provide selective tripping ofmain and tie circuit breaker. Coordinate with feeder circuit-breaker, ground-fault protection.

B. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wiresystems and with the following features:

262413 - 8


SWITCHBOARDS

1. Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy tolerancesas indicated:

a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.d. Megawatts: Plus or minus 2 percent.e. Megavars: Plus or minus 2 percent.f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.h. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent; accumulated values

unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours.i. Megawatt Demand: Plus or minus 2 percent; demand interval programmable from five

to 60 minutes.j. Contact devices to operate remote impulse-totalizing demand meter.

2. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument compartmentdoor.

C. Ammeters, Voltmeters, and Power-Factor Meters: ANSI C39.1.

1. Meters: 4-inch diameter or 6 inches square, flush or semiflush, with antiparallax 250-degreescales and external zero adjustment.

2. Voltmeters: Cover an expanded-scale range of nominal voltage plus 10 percent.

D. Instrument Switches: Rotary type with off position.

1. Voltmeter Switches: Permit reading of all phase-to-phase voltages and, where a neutral isindicated, phase-to-neutral voltages.

2. Ammeter Switches: Permit reading of current in each phase and maintaincurrent-transformer secondaries in a closed-circuit condition at all times.

E. Feeder Ammeters: 2-1/2-inch minimum size with 90- or 120-degree scale. Meter and transferdevice with off position, located on overcurrent device door for indicated feeder circuits only.

2.4 CONTROL POWER

A. Control Circuits: 120-V ac, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from control-powertransformer.

B. Control Circuits: 120-V ac, supplied from remote branch circuit.

C. Control Circuits: 12-V dc.

D. Electrically Interlocked Main and Tie Circuit Breakers: Two control-power transformers in separatecompartments, with interlocking relays, connected to the primary side of each control-powertransformer at the line side of the associated main circuit breaker. 120-V secondaries connectedthrough automatic transfer relays to ensure a fail-safe automatic transfer scheme.

E. Control-Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current-limiting and overload protection oftransformer and fuses for protection of control circuits.

262413 - 9


SWITCHBOARDS

F. Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide flexibleconductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors forinterconnections between shipping units.

2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Suitably identified, wall-mounted, lockable, compartmented steel box orcabinet. Arrange for wall mounting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards according to NECA 400.

B. Examine switchboards before installation. Reject switchboards that are moisture damaged orphysically damaged.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation tolerancesand other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NECA 400.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, 4-inch nominal thickness. Complywith requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concretebase and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets andtemporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.

D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration andSeismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

E. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for switchboards,including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame offinished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front ofswitchboards.

262413 - 10


SWITCHBOARDS

F. Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections.

G. Install overcurrent protective devices, transient voltage suppression devices, and instrumentation.

1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

H. Install spare-fuse cabinet.

I. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for terminating feeder bus specified in Division 26 Section "Enclosed BusAssemblies." Drawings indicate general arrangement of bus, fittings, and specialties.

B. Comply with requirements for terminating cable trays specified in Division 26 Section "Cable Traysfor Electrical Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of cable trays, fittings, andspecialties.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signscomplying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification forElectrical Systems."

B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying withrequirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

C. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each meterand control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with requirementsfor identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspectcomponents, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assistin testing.

C. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

262413 - 11


SWITCHBOARDS

D. Tests and Inspections:


2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 daysafter Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchboard. Remove frontand rear panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of eachswitchboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detectsignificant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged andmalfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies switchboards includedand that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial actiontaken, and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommendedby manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat, to maintain temperature according to manufacturer'swritten instructions, until switchboard is ready to be energized and placed into service.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchboards, overcurrentprotective devices, instrumentation, and accessories.


262416 - 1


PANELBOARDS

PANELBOARDS SECTION 262416

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards.2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transientvoltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions andmanufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, andfinishes.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

C. Field Quality-Control Reports:


requirements.

D. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective

device that allows adjustments.

262416 - 2


PANELBOARDS


A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, andaccessories from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboardsincluding clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply withindicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, bya qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electricheating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.


A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet workin spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVACsystem is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions atoccupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwiseindicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F.b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied byOwner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging toprovide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electricservice.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect's written permission.3. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.8 COORDINATION

262416 - 3


PANELBOARDS

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction thatpenetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors andpanels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-boltinserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified inDivision 03.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replacetransient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warrantyperiod.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types: Two

spares for each panelboard.3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,

but no fewer than three of each size and type.4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each

size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined inDivision 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.c. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.d. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 5.

2. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trimcover.

262416 - 4


PANELBOARDS

3. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front withflanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.

4. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreatingwith manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat andthermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim.c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices

and other components.

5. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

C. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.

D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box.3. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated from

box.4. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as

suitable for nonlinear loads.5. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections.

E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type.4. Feed-Through Lugs: Compression type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at

opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate

at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.6. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at

same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.7. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra-capacity

neutral bus.

F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or loadcenters with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or remoteupstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type ofallowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit ratingby an NRTL.

H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit currentavailable at terminals.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

262416 - 5


PANELBOARDS



B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-oncircuit breakers.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-oncircuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanicalrelease for removal.

G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.

H. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, electrically held, general-purpose controller, withsame short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.

1. Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary andsecondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection.

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide manufacturers offering productsthat may be incorporated into the Work include the following:


B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbingadjacent units.

D. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.4 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS


262416 - 6


PANELBOARDS

1. Current Technology; a subsidiary of Danahar Corporation.2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.3. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.4. Liebert Corporation.5. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.6. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Surge Protection Device: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, solid-state,parallel-connected, non-modular type, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules,UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the panelboardshort-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories:

1. Accessories:

a. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.b. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.c. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, for remote monitoring of protection

status.

2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective devicetest, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing frompanelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters andswitchboard class relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or havebeen subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerancesand other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install panelboards on concrete bases, 4-inch nominal thickness.

C. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

262416 - 7


PANELBOARDS

D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboardswith fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

G. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designatedto be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or belowslab not on grade.

H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing loadbalancing.

I. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signscomplying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporateOwner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriterto create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirementsfor identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplatecomplying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification forElectrical Systems."


A. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,and control circuit.





C. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

262416 - 8


PANELBOARDS

D. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards includedand that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial actiontaken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommendedby manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "OvercurrentProtective Device Coordination Study."

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance,measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the

facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machinesand on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readingsbefore and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, isnot acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer'swritten instructions.


262726 - 1


WIRING DEVICES

WIRING DEVICES SECTION 262726

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.2. Isolated-ground receptacles.3. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.4. Solid-state fan speed controls.5. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors.6. Communications outlets.7. Cord and plug sets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing labelwarnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.


262726 - 2


WIRING DEVICES

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one sourcefrom a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associatedwall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked forintended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers'names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).

2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration5-20R, and UL 498.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may beincorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex).b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex).c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).

B. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.


a. Hubbell; CR 5253IG.b. Leviton; 5362-IG.c. Pass & Seymour; IG6300.

262726 - 3


WIRING DEVICES

2. Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to thegreen grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation frommounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent onremovable parts.

C. GFCI RECEPTACLES

D. General Description: Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6,UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped.

E. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; GF20.b. Pass & Seymour; 2084.

2.3 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements ofequipment being connected.

1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; withgreen-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30percent.

2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type forconnection.

2.4 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way).b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224 (four

way).c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four

way).d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way), 20AC4

(four way).

C. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; 2221L.b. Hubbell; HBL1221L.c. Leviton; 1221-2L.d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.

262726 - 4


WIRING DEVICES

2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

D. WALL-BOX DIMMERS

E. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, withaudible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.

F. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply withUL 1472.

G. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve. On-off switchpositions shall bypass dimmer module.

1. 600 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices.

H. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometerto adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low endnot greater than 20 percent of full brightness.

2.5 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Long-Range Wall-Switch Sensors:


a. Hubbell; ATD1600WRP.b. Leviton; ODW12-MRW.c. Watt Stopper (The);

2. Description: Dual technology, with both passive-infrared- and ultrasonic-type sensing,120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 110-degree field of view, and a minimumcoverage area of 1200 sq. ft..

B. WALL PLATES

C. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inchthick, satin-finished stainless steel.3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.4. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and

labeled for use in "wet locations."

D. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistantthermoplastic with lockable cover.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect, unlessotherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

262726 - 5


WIRING DEVICES

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.3. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: As specified above, with orange triangle on face.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finishmaterials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided byriding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a jointunless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated ondevices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoidscoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signsthat they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connectconductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the lastpossible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

262726 - 6


WIRING DEVICES

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mountedreceptacles to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outletboxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical andwith grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wallplates..

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or

illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similarproblems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones,and retest as specified above.


262813 - 1


FUSES

FUSES SECTION 262813

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in enclosed switches and enclosedcontrollers .

2. Spare-fuse cabinets.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material,dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include thefollowing for each fuse type indicated:

1. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electricalcharacteristics, and ratings.

2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves (instantaneous

peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse.4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.5. Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenancemanuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data,"include the following:

1. Ambient temperature adjustment information.2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves (instantaneous

peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse.4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source fromsingle manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, bya qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

262813 - 2


FUSES

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Comply with UL 248-11 for plug fuses.


A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F more than100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size andwith system short-circuit current levels.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than twoof each size and type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.2. Edison Fuse, Inc.3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.4. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent withcircuit voltages.

2.3 PLUG FUSES

A. Characteristics: UL 248-11, nonrenewable plug fuses; 125-V ac.

2.4 PLUG-FUSE ADAPTERS

262813 - 3


FUSES

A. Characteristics: Adapters for using Type S, rejection-base plug fuses in Edison-base fuseholdersor sockets; ampere ratings matching fuse ratings; irremovable once installed.

2.5 SPARE-FUSE CABINET

A. Characteristics: Wall-mounted steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged door and key-codedcam lock and pull.

1. Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 15 but not less than 3 percent sparecapacity minimum.

2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel.3. Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch- high letters on exterior of door.4. Fuse Pullers: For each size of fuse, where applicable and available, from fuse manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditionsaffecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes andwith characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied tofuse ratings.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses:

1. Service Entrance: Class RK1, time delay.2. Feeders: Class RK1, time delay.3. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.4. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.5. Control Circuits: Class CC, time delay.

B. Plug Fuses:

1. Motor Branch Circuits: Type S, dual-element time delay.2. Other Branch Circuits: Type S, dual-element time delay.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removingfuse.

262813 - 4


FUSES

B. Install plug-fuse adapters in Edison-base fuseholders and sockets. Ensure that adapters areirremovable once installed.

C. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s).

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section"Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door ofeach fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.


262816 - 1


ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS SECTION 262816

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditionsand other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches.2. Nonfusible switches.3. Receptacle switches.4. Shunt trip switches.5. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).6. Molded-case switches.7. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and componentindicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical dataon features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.2. Current and voltage ratings.3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of

overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrentprotective device.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.


262816 - 2




requirements.

D. Manufacturer's field service report.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include inemergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuitbreakers.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices,components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from singlemanufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosedswitches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces andother items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, bya qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.



A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditionsunless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied byOwner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging toprovide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electricservice.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect's written permission.4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipmentserved and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearancesfor equipment access doors and panels.

262816 - 3



1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer thanthree of each size and type.

2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated onDrawings or comparable product by one of the following:


C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle withcapability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum groundconductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeledfor copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.5. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES



262816 - 4



B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked withcover in closed position.

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, tocomply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.3. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliancewith installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unlessotherwise indicated.

B. Install fuses in fusible devices.

C. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component,connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.




262816 - 5




C. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests andinspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches andcircuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommendedby manufacturer.


262913 - 1


ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS SECTION 262913

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes ac, enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less, of the following types:

1. Across-the-line, manual and magnetic controllers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include dimensions and manufacturer'stechnical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation, andmaintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation andMaintenance Data," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and all installed components.2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

D. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed andarrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents.

E. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have beeninstalled and arrange to demonstrate that dip switch settings for motor running overload protectionsuit actual motor to be protected.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 100 miles of Project site,a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed controllers of a single type through one source from a singlemanufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked forintended use.


262913 - 2



E. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosedcontrollers, minimum clearances between enclosed controllers, and for adjacent surfaces and otheritems. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions and clearances.


A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupiedby Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arrangingto provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electricalservice.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities.3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Architect's written permission.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including conduit,piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and requiredclearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-PlaceConcrete."

C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items arespecified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

D. Coordinate features of enclosed controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices and controlcircuits to which they connect.

E. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each enclosed controller with ratings andcharacteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of motor and load.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. ABB Power Distribution, Inc.; ABB Control, Inc. Subsidiary.2. Danfoss Inc.; Danfoss Electronic Drives Div.3. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.4. General Electrical Company; GE Industrial Systems.5. Rockwell Automation; Allen-Bradley Co.; Industrial Control Group.6. Siemens/Furnas Controls.7. Square D.

262913 - 3



2.2 ACROSS-THE-LINE ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

A. Manual Controller: NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A, with "quick-make, quick-break" toggleor pushbutton action, and marked to show whether unit is "OFF," "ON," or "TRIPPED."

1. Overload Relay: Ambient-compensated type with inverse-time-current characteristics andNEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping characteristics. Relays shall have heaters and sensors ineach phase, matched to nameplate, full-load current of specific motor to which they connectand shall have appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.

B. ENCLOSURES

C. Description: Flush- or surface-mounting cabinets as indicated. NEMA 250, Type 1, unlessotherwise indicated to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.2. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

2.3 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested enclosed controllersbefore shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers for compliance with requirements,installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Select features of each enclosed controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supplycircuit and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of motor, controller, and load; andconfiguration of pilot device and control circuit affecting controller functions.

B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. For control equipment at walls, bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight structural-steel channelsbolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Division 26Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

B. Install freestanding equipment on concrete bases.

C. Enclosed Controller Fuses: Install fuses in each fusible switch. Comply with requirements inDivision 26 Section "Fuses."

262913 - 4



3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify enclosed controller, components, and control wiring according to Division 26 Section"Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Conduit installation requirements are specified in other Division 26 Sections. Drawings indicategeneral arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for ElectricalSystems."


A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element, bus, component, connectingsupply, feeder, and control circuit.


B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection, except optional tests,stated in NETA ATS, "Motor Control - Motor Starters." Certify compliance with testparameters.



Project No. 1216 @the.stacy.group

262913 - 1



TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECT POWER CIRCUITS SECTION 264313

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes TVSSs (S.P.D.) for low-voltage power, control, and communicationequipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.

B. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

C. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating weights,operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Product Certificates: For transient voltage suppression devices, signed by product manufacturercertifying compliance with the most recent edition of the following standards:

1. UL 1283.2. UL 1449.

C. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

D. Field quality-control test reports, including the following:

1. Test procedures used.2. Test results that comply with requirements.3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transient voltage suppression devices to include inemergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


262913 - 2




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and capabilityto conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical TestingAssociation or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational ElectricalTesting Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies tosupervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain suppression devices and accessories through one source from a singlemanufacturer.

C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, dimensional requirements, and electrical performance ofsuppressors and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "ProductRequirements."

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked forintended use.

E. Comply with IEEE C62.41, "IEEE Guide for Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits," andtest devices according to IEEE C62.45, "IEEE Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connectedto Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits."

F. Comply with NEMA LS 1, "Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices."

G. Comply with UL 1283, "Electromagnetic Interference Filters," and UL 1449, 3rd Edition.


A. Service Conditions: Rate surge protection devices for continuous operation under the followingconditions, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Not less than 115 percent of nominal systemoperating voltage.

2. Operating Temperature: 30 to 120 deg F (0 to 50 deg C).3. Humidity: 0 to 85 percent, noncondensing.4. Altitude: Less than 20,000 feet (6090 m) above sea level.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of field-mounted surge suppressors to allow adequate clearances formaintenance.

B. Coordinate surge protection devices with Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring andControl."

1.8 WARRANTY


262913 - 3



A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replacecomponents of surge suppressors that fail in materials or workmanship within five years from dateof Substantial Completion.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Replaceable Protection Modules: One of each size and type installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Advanced Protection Technologies, Inc.2. Current Technology, Inc.3. LEA International.4. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson.5. Square D; Schneider Electric.6. Dynatech.

2.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS

A. Surge Protection Device Description: Modular exterior mounted design with field-replaceablemodules, sine-wave-tracking type with the following features and accessories:

1. Fuses, rated at 300-kA interrupting capacity.2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.3. Integral disconnect switch.4. Redundant suppression circuits.5. Redundant replaceable modules.

6. Arrangement with low-impedance wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and groundbus.

7. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.8. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.9. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, for remote monitoring of protection status.

Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system.10. Surge-event operations counter.

B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 300 kA per phase.


262913 - 4



C. Connection Means: Permanently wired utilizing low impedance cabling not to exceed 3' in overalllength.

D. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with voltages of 480Y/277 and208Y/120 , 3-phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277 and 400 V for 208Y/120.2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 and 400 V for 208Y/120.3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 and 400 V for 208Y/120.

E. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, single-phase, 3-wire circuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 400 V.2. Line to Ground: 400 V.3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.

F. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits with high leg shall beas follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 400 V, 800 V from high leg.2. Line to Ground: 400 V.3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.

2.3 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS

A. Surge Protection Device Description: Modular exterior mounted design with field-replaceablemodules, sign-wave-tracking type with the following features and accessories:

1. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.3. Integral disconnect switch.4. Redundant suppression circuits.5. Redundant replaceable modules. 6. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.7. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.8. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.9. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V, ac, for remote monitoring of protection status.

Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system.10. Surge-event operations counter.

B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 160 kA or 80kA per phase (See plan sheets).

C. Connection Means: Permanently wired utilizing low impedance cabling not to exceed 3'-0" overalllength.

D. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with voltages of 480Y/277 and208Y/120, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277 and 400 V for 208Y/120.2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 and 400 V for 208Y/120.3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 and 400 V for 208Y/120.


262913 - 5



E. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits with high leg shall beas follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 400 V, 800 V from high leg.2. Line to Ground: 400 V.3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. All T.V.S.S. devices shall be externally mounted adjacentto the respective panels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLACING SYSTEM INTO SERVICE

A. Do not energize or connect panelboards to their sources until surge protection devices are installedand connected.


A. Testing: Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing surge protection devices, but before electrical circuitry has been energized,test for compliance with requirements.

2. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.3. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS,

"Surge Arresters, Low-Voltage Surge Protection Devices" Section. Certify compliance withtest parameters.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel toadjust, operate, and maintain transient voltage suppression devices. Refer to Division 01 Section"Demonstration and Training."


265100 - 1


INTERIOR LIGHTING

INTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265100

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.2. Emergency lighting units.3. Exit signs.4. Lighting fixture supports.5. Retrofit kits for fluorescent lighting fixtures.


1. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CRI: Color-rendering index.

C. CU: Coefficient of utilization.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

G. RCR: Room cavity ratio.

H. LED: Light Emitting Diode

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include dataon features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.3. Ballast.

265100 - 2


INTERIOR LIGHTING

4. Energy-efficiency data.5. Life, output, and energy-efficiency data for lamps.6. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each lighting fixture type,

outfitted with lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lightingfixture as applied in this Project.

a. Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a currentaccreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP)for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.


D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency,operation, and maintenance manuals.

E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.




1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other constructionthat penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppressionsystem, and partition assemblies.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 for every 25 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at

least two of each type.3. Battery and Charger: One for each emergency lighting unit.4. Ballasts/Drivers: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of

each type.5. Fixtures: 1 of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

265100 - 3


INTERIOR LIGHTING

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warpingand sagging.

E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operatingconditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors,frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and whensecured in operating position.

F. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.

G. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowingand other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless different thickness is indicated.b. UV stabilized.

2.2 EMERGENCY LED POWER UNIT

A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixturebody and compatible with LED driver and any applicable dimming controls.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate continuously at an output of 900 or 1100 lumens each.Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture driver.

2. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without entering ceiling space.

a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power anddemonstrates unit operability.

b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type (or as directed by manufacturer).4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer relay.5. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates

coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unittriggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of eitherproper or failed emergency response.

B. External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, suitable for powering one or more LEDlamps, remote mounted from lighting fixture. Dual Lite LG1S (or approved equal).

265100 - 4


INTERIOR LIGHTING

1. Emergency Connection: Operate continuously at an output of 900 or 1100 lumens each.Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture driver.

2. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without entering ceiling space.

a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power anddemonstrates unit operability.

b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type (or as directed by manufacturer).4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer relay.5. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates

coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unittriggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of eitherproper or failed emergency response.

2.3 EXIT SIGNS

A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, complywith authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power

pack.

a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops

to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relaydisconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated oncharger.

d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal powerand demonstrates unit operability.

e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

f. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unitinitiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiverin tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visualconfirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

g. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiatescode-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure isannunciated by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED.

2.4 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

265100 - 5


INTERIOR LIGHTING

B. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel,12 gage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture.

B. Support for Lighting Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as a supportelement.

1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate notmore than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixturecorner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans orcenter in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metalchannels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture.Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verifytransfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating andinterpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliancewith standards.


265600 - 1


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265600

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts/drivers.


1. Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exteriorsurfaces of buildings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CRI: Color-rendering index.

B. LED: Light Emitting Diode.

C. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each luminaire, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unitdesignation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area,and verification of indicated parameters.

2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories.3. Details of installation and construction.4. Luminaire materials.5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with indicated

lamps, ballasts, and accessories.

a. Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a currentaccreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program forEnergy Efficient Lighting Products.

6. Photoelectric relays.7. Ballasts or Drivers, including energy-efficiency data.8. Lamps or LED modules, including life, output, and energy-efficiency data.9. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for

components involved.

265600 - 2


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

B. Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.


D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires to include in emergency, operation, andmaintenance manuals.



B. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Lamps or LED modules: 1 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least oneof each type.

2. Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: 1 for every 10 of each type andrating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

3. Ballasts/Drivers: 1 for every 10 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of eachtype.

4. Fixtures: 1 of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations byan NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form andsupport to prevent warping and sagging.

E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform inuse. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

F. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.

G. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, andUV radiation.

265600 - 3


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

H. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distributionto indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.

I. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

J. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushionlenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

K. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminairebefore shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials.

L. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual forArchitectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," toremove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind weldsand polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, fromuncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," orSSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primerand two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.

.a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 LED LAMPS OR MODULES:

A. Minimum CRI: 80

B. Color Temperature for exterior fixtures: See fixture schedule.

C. Minimum life rating: 50,000 hours.

D. No LED shall be “over driven”. Do not exceed 100% rating of LED manufacturer’s driver current.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION

A. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.

1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for theapplication and approved by manufacturer.


265600 - 4


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires andenergizing circuits with normal power source.

1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.


265600 - 1


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

SOUND REINFORCEMENT SECTION 275116

GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF SPECIFICATION

A. This specification covers all sound reinforcement and sound reproduction systems. The objectiveis to provide fully professional systems, completely installed, acceptance tested, and ready for use.

B. Drawings pertaining to this specification shall be considered as a part of the specification and shallbe a part of the bidding documents.

C. Specification drawings are detailed only to the extent necessary to show design intent and signalflow. It is understood and agreed by the contractor that the work herein described shall be completein every detail, even though every item necessarily involved is not specifically mentioned.

D. The General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Electrical General Provisions, and theapplicable requirements of Division 1 apply to each and every contract, contractor, subcontractoror other persons supplying materials and/or labor for this project.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK AND CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY

A. Supply and install complete sound amplification systems including all apparatus and equipment,wiring, labor, and services required to provide systems of broadcast quality in excellent workingorder as specified and as shown on drawings.

B. Contract drawings are detailed only as necessary to show the intended functionality of AV systems.All equipment indicated is intended as a “Basis of Design” and is provided to indicate a minimumfor equipment construction, performance, and approximate physical characteristics. E. C. Shallengage a licensed AV systems designer/installer regularly engaged in the design and installationof similar systems to prepare final design and shop drawings, ensure overall suitability of systemsfor their intended use, and oversee final installation and testing of all equipment.

C. The contractor is responsible for verifying the completeness of parts lists, the correctness of the typenumbers and the overall suitability of the equipment to meet the main purpose of the specifications.The contractor, even if not specifically mentioned herein or on drawings, shall supply any additionalequipment needed in order to meet the requirements stated above, without claim for additionalpayment. The contractor must obtain, in writing, explicit approval from the architect for any changesor substitutions to the specification. In addition to the above, the Scope of Work shall also include:

1. Submission of shop drawings for approval prior to fabrication.2. Verification of dimensions and conditions at the job site.3. Installation in accordance with these specifications, manufacturer’s recommendations, and

all applicable code requirements.4. Initial tests and adjustments, written report, demonstration for approval, participation in

acceptance tests, and final adjustments, as required.5. Instruction and training of operating personnel.6. Equipment warranty and maintenance services as specified in Section 4 at no charge to

owner.7. Maintain a complete set of system drawings and specifications at the site at all times during

installation.

265600 - 2


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

8. Supplying of all components, installation, wiring, and testing shall be the responsibility of asingle contractor.

9. Provide to the electrical contractor for installation:a. Loudspeaker back boxes to which conduit attaches.b. Any special size boxes as noted on drawing.

10. Furnish test equipment, parts, and tools to assist in the final tuning, and acceptance testing.11. Furnish personnel for the period of time as specified in Section 4 for testing.12. Make any adjustments in the system, which may be found necessary during the acceptance

testing.13. Provide and install any/all related A/V and/or data system cabling as required to interface all

systems as described by the contract documents.

1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. The AC power and conduit system serving the sound systems is to be furnished and installed bythe electrical contractor. The locations of microphone receptacles and loudspeaker outlets areshown on the drawings. The conduit riser diagrams shown on the drawings are for information only.The Contractor is to coordinate with the electrical contractor and verify that conduit and J-box sizesand location are correct.

1.4 MATERIALS

A. All material and equipment shall be ne and shall conform to applicable requirements of theUnderwriter’s Laboratories and the American National Standards Institute. Certain items ofequipment are specified herein by manufacturers’ type numbers to indicate the quality and functionalperformance required from the system and its components.

1.5 PROJECT SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings showing general arrangements, descriptions, layouts and designs of allportions of the system, for approval by the Architect.

B. Prior to fabrication, submit to the Architect/Engineer complete shop drawings showing dimensions,arrangements, layouts, construction and finishes, including locations and orientations of each pieceof equipment as called out herein, for approval.

C. As-built shop drawings, schematics, wiring plans, technical manuals, instruction books anddescriptive materials for each piece of equipment shall be delivered in duplicate to the Architect priorto the final acceptance of the system by the Owner. In addition, deliver two (2) sets of documentsto the Owner including equipment guarantees, warranties, repair parts lists and written or drawnconfirmation of any changes to the design, which were necessary and approved and in the bestinterest of the job.

D. Drawings required for approval, prior to fabrication and installation:

1. Block diagrams indicating proposed connections of all equipment and indicating types andmodel number if different from specifications.

2. Layouts of patch panels, equipment racks, and cabinets.3. Loudspeaker mounting arrangements.4. Any unit or panel to be fabricated or modified.5. Loudspeaker grilles.6. Submittals as required by the specifications.7. Others as required by the Architect.

265600 - 3


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

8. Catalog sheets are acceptable where relevant.

E. Samples to be submitted with drawings for approval by the Architect:1. Finish for control face panels, racks, cabinets, and exposed loudspeaker enclosures.

1.6 OPERATOR INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING

A. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 12 hours training on the sound systems. (Three fourhour periods)

B. The Owner and/or his designated representative shall be fully advised as to the function of alloperating controls and in techniques necessary to ensure proper operation of the entire system.

C. Instructions shall be given, via actual demonstration before and during two major activities or events,in the proper operation of the equipment.

D. The Owner or his representative will normally participate during the instruction period.

1.7 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE

A. All equipment, parts, installation, and workmanship shall be warranted free of defects at the solecost of the contractor for a period of time from the date of final acceptance as specified in Section4.

B. Replacement of defective materials and repair of faulty workmanship shall be accomplished withintwo days of discovery or notification by Owner and at not cost to Owner.

C. Paint, exterior finishes, fuses, lamps, and damage due to customer misuse are excluded from theabove warranties except when damage or failure results from defective materials or workmanshipcovered by warranty.

D. The minimum warranty provisions specified above shall not diminish the terms of individualequipment manufacturers’ warranties.

1.8 SERVICE

A. Provide maintenance service for the period of time as specified in Section 4 from the date ofacceptance of installation without additional cost. Service to consist of at least two semi-annualvisits to the site for checking and adjustment of equipment.

B. During this period the Contractor shall answer all service calls within 24 hours.

C. The Contractor, or his representative, shall be available on-call and on short notice, and without costto the owner, during the first month of full-scale operation, following acceptance of the system, toassist the owner and/or his representatives in any problems that may arise during the initial periodof operation.

1.9 QUALITY

A. It is the intent of these Specifications to describe and provide for complete sound systems ofcommercial quality and reliability. Consequently, rigid performance standards for the systeminstallation contractor and the equipment will be required.

265600 - 4


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

B. The Contractor performing the installation shall be a fully accredited sound and video systeminstallation contractor, normally engaged in the business of professional sound and video systeminstallation and on a full-time basis; he shall not be an electrical equipment contractor. TheContractor shall be a factory authorized franchised dealer for the equipment provided. Fullycompetent workmen who are experienced in the installation of professional-type sound and videoequipment shall do the work described herein.

C. Many items are listed in the specifications by the manufacturer’s type or model number, without adetailed performance specification. Where this is the case, no substitutions will be accepted,without the written consent of the Architect. Where the phrase “Approved Acceptable Substitute”appears, the item specified shall set a standard of quality and performance, based on the publisheddata and specifications of the manufacturer and also on the actual performance known by theArchitect. A substitution will be approved in writing only, based upon these criteria.

D. Owner, in all cases, shall be the final judge of the acceptability of the system based on theinspections, testing and recommendations of the Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. The following sections specifically list the acceptable equipment types and items for the systems.Where quantities are not noted, refer to the drawings. In the event of a discrepancy, the greatquantity or quality shall be furnished.

2.2 WIRE AND CABLE

A. All speaker wire shall be No. 12 AWG stranded or larger, with overall out jacket. Acceptable: WestPenn 227.

B. All 70.7 volt distributed speaker system wire shall be No. 16 AWG stranded or larger cable withoverall outer jacket. Acceptable: Belden 8471 or West Penn 225.

C. All microphone cable, (installed, not portable) and all line-level and inter-amplifier wiring shall be twoconductor, twisted pair, color-coded, stranded, No. 22 AWG with separate foil shield and drain wire,and with overall outer jacket. Acceptable: Belden 8451.

2.3 FLOOR BOXES

A. Shall be11-gauge steel temporary construction cover with 11-gauge finished steel cover with carpetedging. Carpet edging shall be Mitered brass or aluminum. The Box shall be .25” high in beveledor square profiles, stainless steel compression latches, fold back cable exit, lift-off full access door,1” or 1.25” knockouts, leveling feet. Provide with one single gang dual outlet and custom panels asshown on drawings.

1. Acceptable: FSL FL-600P with Lid finish by architect.

2.4 CUSTOM PANELS

265600 - 5


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

A. All custom panels shall be 1/8-inch aluminum, brushed, anodized black and labeled by engravedblock letters. Engraved letters shall be appropriately proportioned and the minimum size shall be1/8 inch high.

2.5 EQUIPMENT RACKS

A. A/V system racks shall be constructed of 16-gauge C.R.S. and shall have 11-gauge C.R.S.adjustable tapped mounting rails. Mounting rails shall be tapped for 10-32 screws. It shall have ½”(13mm) – ¾” (19mm) conduit knockouts on the top, bottom, and rear flanges. Provide adequatevertical separation between each piece of equipment, and fill all unused space with vent panels.Provide adequate ventilation by the use of a rack fan unit in all racks. Provide 110-volt AC stripswith 15 percent additional unused outlets. Wire AC as indicated on plan sheets. Coordinate rackmounting requirements with millwork supplier. All racks shall be provided with locking perforatedsteel doors with filtration media.

1. Acceptable: (Classroom AV Racks) RAXXESS #WMK-7 with Active Thermal Managementand #PD-800 power distribution unit.

2. Acceptable: (AV1) RAXXESS #SWR-35-17 with Active Thermal Management and #LPPS-93-circuit power strip and locking cover.

2.6 WIRE TERMINATIONS

A. All loudspeaker and control lines entering equipment racks shall be connected by the use of barrier-type terminal blocks. Acceptable: AMP FB6

2.7 LOUDSPEAKERS:

A. LOUDSPEAKER TYPE S1:

An 8" two-way, full-range system with adjustable dispersion. Frequency response shall be 95 Hz– 18 kHz, power capacity 160 W, sensitivity at 1 W, 1 m of 93 dB SPL, and nominal impedance of8 ohms. Loudspeaker shall be provided in color to match architectural finishes.

1. Acceptable: JBL CONTROL 67 PT or acceptable substitute.2. Quantity: Per drawings

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Electrical Power Interface

1. Review and coordinate electrical power system installation with the electrical contractor toinsure proper operation of the equipment specified herein.

B. Conduit Interface

265600 - 6


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

1. Review and coordinate conduit and J-box installation with the electrical contractor to insureproper size and location.

C. All equipment, except portable equipment, shall be firmly held in place. This shall includeloudspeakers, enclosures, amplifiers, cables, etc. Fastenings and supports adequate to supporttheir loads with a safety factor of at least three unless otherwise stated.

D. Locate all apparatus requiring adjustments, cleaning or similar attention so that it will be accessible.Equipment shall be positioned to permit full access for operation and service.

E. All supporting structures and enclosures supplied by the contractor not having a standard factorypaint finish shall be painted. Paint specifications will be supplied by the Owner or indicated herein

F. Color and finish of materials supplied, which are exposed to public view, shall be verified with theArchitect.

G. Color and finished of blank panels and custom assembly panels shall match adjacent equipmentpanels as closely as possible.

3.2 WIRING

A. Exercise care in wiring, so as to avoid damage to the cables and to the equipment. All joints andconnections to be made with rosin-core solder or with mechanical connectors approved by theArchitect, with the exception that mechanical connectors shall not be used on microphone lineconnections. All wiring shall be executed in strict adherence to standard broadcast practices.

B. Cables shall be free of splices between terminations at the specified equipment. No splices inconduits.

C. Separate conduit and/or cable harnesses shall be maintained for wiring carrying signals in thefollowing groups:

1. Mic levels and levels below -20dBm2. Line levels and nominal levels from -20dB, to +30dBm3. Loudspeaker levels4. Control cables5. AC power cables

D. All wires and cables used in assembling custom panels and equipment racks shall be formed intoharnesses which are tied and supported in accordance with accepted engineering practice.

E. Harnessed cables shall be combed straight. Harnesses with intertwined members areunacceptable. Each cable that breaks out from a harness for termination shall be provided with aservice loop.

F. Harnessed cables shall be formed in either a vertical or a horizontal relationship to equipment,controls, components or terminations.

G. All system components and related wiring shall be located with due regard for the minimization ofinduced electro-magnetic and electrostatic noise, for the minimization of wiring length, for properventilation, and to provide reasonable safety and convenience for the operator.

265600 - 7


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

H. Ground power conduits to the power system ground. Do not connect power system conduits to theracks or to the audio system ground. Insulate all conductors including shields of audio lines inconduit from the conduit and from each other for the entire conduit length.

I. Wiring of 3-pin connectors, receptacles, jacks, and plugs:

1. Pin 1 or sleeve: shield2. Pin 2 or tip: + red (or white)3. Pin 3 or ring: - black

J. Wiring of balanced/ unbalanced circuits; all circuits shall be wired as balanced throughout thesystem except that the black wire shall connect to pin 1 (or sleeve) at the unbalanced receptacle.

K. Wiring of 2-pin loudspeaker connectors and receptacles:

1. Pin 1 or - : black2. Pin 2 or +: white (or red)

3.3 LABELS

A. Except where otherwise specified, mark all switches, controls, receptacles, and general informationlabeling with engraved plastic laminate or metal plates. Dry transfer or other types of adhesivelabels are not acceptable. Legends to be as shown on drawings and as specified.

B. Identify all wires and cables at every termination and connection point with permanent markers.Record these identifying numbers on as-built drawings.

C. Provide and install on front panel, engraved labels for each item of rack-mounted equipment.Designate as shown on functional and patch panel diagrams.

1. Microphone Receptacles: Engraved “MIC” with circuit number corresponding to drawings.2. Line level Receptacles: Engraved “LINE” with circuit number corresponding to drawings.3. Portable monitor loudspeaker receptacles: Engraved “MON” with circuit number

corresponding to drawings.

3.4 INITIAL TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS

A. Provide all necessary equipment and perform initial tests. Adjust as necessary to provide systemperformance conforming to specifications.

1. Absolute Impedance

a. Measure absolute impedance of each loudspeaker line at 250, 1000, and 4000 Hz,without amplifier connected, but with all loudspeakers connected. Loudspeaker levelcontrols to be set at zero attenuation. Impedance shall be at least 90% of rated loadimpedance of respective amplifier. Check resistance of lines to all loudspeaker andmicrophone receptacles, with receptacles open and short circuited.

2. Hum and Noise Level

a. Adjust gain controls for optimum signal-to-noise ratio and full amplifier output with -35dB, level at a microphone input and 0 dBm at line level input.

265600 - 8


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

b. Without changing gain, terminate microphone and line level inputs with shieldedresistor of 150 and 600 ohms respectively.

c. Measure overall hum and noise level at each power amplifier output for each inputchannel. Level shall be at least 60 dB below rated power output of amplifier over abandwidth of 20-20,000 Hz.

3. Electrical Distortion

a. Load power amplifiers with resistors matching nominal impedance of output terminalsused in system in place of actually loudspeaker loads.

b. Adjust gain controls as for hum and noise level test.c. Apply 1,000 Hz sine-wave signal from an oscillator having less than 0.5% total

harmonic distortion to each microphone and line level input at level required toproduce measured amplifier output.

d. Note that most oscillators require a 40 dB or 50 dB pad with 150 ohm outputimpedance to properly drive a microphone-level input.

e. Measure distortion with a distortion analyzer, to ascertain that distortion is equal orless than published in the manufacturer’s data for the equipment.

4. Parasitic Oscillation and RF Pickup

a. Set up system for each specified mode of operation. Use 5 MHz bandwidthoscilloscope and loudspeaker monitoring. Check to insure that system is free ofspurious oscillation and RF pickup in the absence of any input signal and also withsystem driven momentarily to full output at 800Hz.

5. Loudspeaker Phasing

a. Polarity of loudspeakers in distributed systems:b. Check polarity using speech program material.c. Move slowly from the axis of one loudspeaker to the next. With loudspeakers properly

polarized, the listener should sense a single apparent sound source which is at firstlocated at the first loudspeaker, but which begins to shift smoothly and continuouslytoward the second loudspeaker as he nears the halfway point. At that latter point thesound should appear to come from a point midway between the loudspeakers. Anydeviation from such observation indicates either incorrect polarity of one loudspeakerwith respect to the other or faulty operation of one or both loudspeakers.

6. Buzzes, Rattles, Distortion

a. Apply high quality music or voice signal to the system. Adjust the system for frequentpeaks as its specified maximum sound pressure level.

b. Apply sine-wave sweep from 100 to 5,000 Hz to 6 dB below full amplifier power.c. In both cases, listen carefully for buzzes, rattles and objectionable distortion.

7. Gain Control Settings

a. Establish tentative “normal” settings for all gain controls. Adjust gain controls onpower amplifiers for optimum signal-to-noise ratio and signal balance. If controls areaccessible from the front cap or cover controls to prevent tampering until final testing.Then use control locks or security covers to insure the final setting adjustments arepermanent.

8. Equalization

a. Adjust all equalization to provide performance conforming to specifications.

265600 - 9


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

3.5 CERTIFICATION OF COMPLETION

A. Submit a written report to the Architect detailing the results of initial adjustments and verificationtests including all relevant drawings, charts and photographs. This report shall be completed andsubmitted to the Architect for review prior to arrangements for acceptance testing.

B. With the above report, submit written certification that installation conforms to specification, iscomplete, and is ready for inspection and testing by representatives of the Owner.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF COMPLETED INSTALLATION

A. Upon approval of the above test report, and at a time set by the Architect, the Contractor shalldemonstrate operation of each major component, using each microphone and loudspeakerfurnished, all required microphone and loudspeaker positions, and all input, control and amplificationequipment. After demonstration, the Contractor shall assist as required in the following acceptancetests by representatives of the Owner and Architect.

1. Acceptance testing shall be performed during a period prearranged by the contractor with theArchitect or his representative. The approximate period of time required for acceptancetesting is specified in Section 4.

2. Provide the following test equipment and make it available at all times, on site, during thetesting period.

ITEM MINIMUM SPECIFICATION

Oscilloscope Bw-10MHz, Sens-1mV/cmDigital Multi-meter 1% AccuracyAnalogue V.O.M. Simpson260 or EqualFunction Generator Bw-1MHz, Dist < 1%Real Time Analyzer 1/3 OctavePink Noise Source Bw-20Hz-20kHzImpedance Meter Range 20Hz-20kHz, 1ohm- 50 kohm

3. Be prepared to verify the performance of any portion of the system by demonstration,listening tests and instrumental measurements.

4. Listening Tests

a. These tests may include speech intelligibility surveys and subjective evaluations byobservers listening at various positions under various operating conditions, usingspeech, music and live or recorded program material.

5. Equipment Tests

a. Any measurements of frequency response, distortion, noise or other characteristicsand any operational tests deemed necessary may be performed on any item or groupof items to determine conformity with specifications.

b. Correct all causes of noticed defects. If cause is outside the system, promptly notifythe Architect, indicating cause and suggested corrective procedures.

265600 - 10


EXTERIOR LIGHTING

3.7 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION

A. Prepare and submit an operation and maintenance manual(s), neatly bound, for the Owner’s use.Manual is to include:

1. Basic power on/off and operational procedure.

2. All available manufacturer’s service literature for each major system component.

3. An as-built system block diagram with all input/output terminations and patch pointsidentified.

4. A copy of the initial test report.

5. Copies of all as-build drawings.

6. Installation and storage procedures.

PART 4 - TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF INSTALLATION

A. System Warranty Period: From the date of final acceptance, the warranty period is one (3) years.

B. System Maintenance Period: From the date of final acceptance, the maintenance period is two (2)years.

C. Personnel For Acceptance Tests and Final Adjustments: The Contractor shall provide qualifiedpersonnel that are familiar with the installation, knowledgeable of the operation of the systems andtest equipment, and are capable of making any and all tests and adjustments required by Architect.The Contractor is to provide personnel for training periods as follows:

AV System: (1) 2-hour period for all teachers/administrators. Attend and assist in use aminimum of 2 school functions utilizing the AV system


283111 - 1


DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM SECTION 283111

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire-alarm control unit.2. Manual fire-alarm boxes.3. System smoke detectors.4. Nonsystem smoke detectors.5. Heat detectors.6. Notification appliances.7. Magnetic door holders.8. Remote annunciator.9. Addressable interface device.10. Digital alarm communicator transmitter.11. Radio alarm transmitter.12. System printer.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated tofire-alarm service only.

B. Noncoded addressable system, with automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors andmultiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General Submittal Requirements:

283111 - 2



1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them toArchitect.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum.c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, andattachments to other work.

1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of FireAlarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits.3. Include battery-size calculations.4. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that each

detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible whenair-handling system is operating.

5. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts,drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them.Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detectorhousing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according tomanufacturer's written recommendations.

6. Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding schematic,amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.

7. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressabledevice. Show size and route of cable and conduits.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency,operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter inNFPA 72.

2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "PermanentRecords" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.

3. Record copy of site-specific software.4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of the

same name and include the following:

a. Frequency of testing of installed components.b. Frequency of inspection of installed components.c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.d. Manufacturer's user training manuals.

5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit.7. Copy of NFPA 25.

283111 - 3



G. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files.3. Device address list.4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation ofunits required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level IIItechnician.

C. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from singlesource from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as, anextension of existing system.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, bya qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL.

F. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company.

G. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 in the form of a placard by anFMG-approved alarm company.


A. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities occupiedby Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arrangingto provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than 5 days in advance ofproposed interruption of fire-alarm service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Architect's, ConstructionManager's and Owner's written permission.

B. Integration of existing system and new or expanded fire alarm: Fire Alarm System provided for thenew construction shall fully integrate and communicate with the existing system in compliance withNFPA 72 and as required by the authority having jurisdiction.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS


283111 - 4



1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed,but no fewer than 1 unit.

2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than1 unit.

3. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each typeinstalled, but no fewer than 1 unit of each type.

4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewerthan 1 unit of each type.

5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamperproofed components.6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: Two of each type installed.7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Insert manufacturer'sname; product name or designation or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Faraday; Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.2. Federal Signal Corporation.3. Fire Control Instruments, Inc.; a Honeywell company.4. Fire Lite Alarms; a Honeywell company.5. GE Infrastructure; a unit of General Electric Company.6. NOTIFIER; a Honeywell company.7. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.; Fire Safety Division.8. Silent Knight; a Honeywell company.

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:

1. Manual stations.2. Heat detectors.3. Flame detectors.4. Smoke detectors.5. Duct smoke detectors.6. Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors.7. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.8. Fire-extinguishing system operation.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.2. Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators.3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.4. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.5. Activate voice/alarm communication system.6. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode.

283111 - 5



7. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.8. Record events in the system memory.9. Record events by the system printer.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Valve supervisory switch.

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating

devices.3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits.5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.6. Break in standby battery circuitry.7. Failure of battery charging.8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.

E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate atfire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. Record the event on system printer.

2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:

1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronicmodules, complying with UL 864 and listed and labeled by an NRTL.

a. System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasableprogrammable read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through failureof primary and secondary power supplies.

b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder andprinter.

2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.

a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow foradjustment of sensitivity at fire-alarm control unit.

b. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity rangeof the device.

3. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.

B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator atfire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision.Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and controlmenu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 3 line(s) of 40 characters, minimum.2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control

commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control ofsmoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.

283111 - 6



C. Circuits:

1. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A.

a. Initiating Device Circuits: Style D.b. Notification Appliance Circuits: Style Z.c. Signaling Line Circuits: Style 2, Style 5, Style 6 or Style 7.d. Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit.

2. Serial Interfaces: Two RS-232 ports for printers.

D. Smoke-Alarm Verification:

1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire-alarm control unit.2. Activate an NRTL-listed and -approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire-alarm control unit

and detector.3. Record events by the system printer.4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.5. Cancel fire-alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.

E. Notification Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in a temporal.

F. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, andtrouble signals to a remote alarm station.

G. Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: Central emergency communication system with redundantmicrophones, preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators provided as a special module that ispart of fire-alarm control unit.

1. Indicated number of alarm channels for automatic, simultaneous transmission of differentannouncements to different zones or for manual transmission of announcements by use ofthe central-control microphone. Amplifiers shall comply with UL 1711 and be listed by anNRTL.

a. Allow the application of and evacuation signal to indicated number of zones and, atsame time, allow voice paging to the other zones selectively or in any combination.

b. Programmable tone and message sequence selection.c. Standard digitally recorded messages for "Evacuation" and "All Clear."d. Generate tones to be sequenced with audio messages of type recommended by

NFPA 72 and that are compatible with tone patterns of notification appliance circuitsof fire-alarm control unit.

2. Status Annunciator: Indicate the status of various voice/alarm speaker zones and the statusof firefighters' two-way telephone communication zones.

3. Preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators shall automatically transfer to backup units, onprimary equipment failure.

H. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events. Identify zone,device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble) and date and time ofoccurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications. Also print system resetevent, including same information for device, location, date, and time. Commands initiate theprinting of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historicallog of events.

283111 - 7



I. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiatingdevices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory and digital alarmcommunicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source.

1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of thepower-supply module rating.

J. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatictransfer switch.

1. Batteries: Sealed, valve-regulated, recombinant lead acid.

K. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glasscover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriateresponse for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system undernormal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finishedin red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visibleindication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surfacemounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.

1. Single-action mechanism, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged tocommunicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; withintegral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm,or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

3. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.4. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to

permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integralbattery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation.

2.5 HEAT DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F] or a rateof rise that exceeds 15 deg F per minute unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting.2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or

trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2.6 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signalcircuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for systemconnections.

283111 - 8



1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mountingassembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for systemconnections.

B. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operatingmechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol.

C. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominalwhite polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved inminimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens.

1. Rated Light Output:

a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.

2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined

with guards in place.4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, CBA.

D. Tone Notification Appliances:

1. Appliances shall comply with UL 1480 and shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL.2. High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W.3. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W.4. Mounting: Flush.5. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of speaker location.

2.7 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm,supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarmcontrol unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.

1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1.

B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights shallmatch those of fire-alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and testfunctions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.

2.8 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system address foralarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to elevator controller to initiate elevator recallor to circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown.

2.9 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

283111 - 9



A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shallcomply with UL 632 and be listed and labeled by an NRTL.

B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-alarmcontrol unit and automatically capture two telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a remotecentral station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If serviceon either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signaland transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station overthe remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the centralstation. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal.

C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the following:

1. Verification that both telephone lines are available.2. Programming device.3. LED display.4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication.5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.

D. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.

E. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.

2.10 SYSTEM PRINTER

A. Printer shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL as an integral part of fire-alarm system.

2.11 DEVICE GUARDS

A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, gong,or other device requiring protection.

1. Factory fabricated and furnished by manufacturer of device.2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.

B. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational beforemaking changes or connections.

1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building.2. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station.3. Expand, modify, and supplement existing control or monitoring equipment as necessary to

extend existing control or monitoring functions to the new points. New components shall becapable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of eithersystem.

283111 - 10



C. Heat-Detector Spacing:

1. Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices"Chapter, for heat-detector spacing.

2. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet or 5 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-airopening.

3. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lightingfixture.

D. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells andhorns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.

E. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6inches below the ceiling.

F. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

G. Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Surface mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above thefinished floor.

H. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smokepartitions, comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." Connect hardwareand devices to fire-alarm system.

1. Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm system in thisSection before making connections.

B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices andsystems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device controlled. Make anaddressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system beingcontrolled.

1. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt trip breaker.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements foridentification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wirefrom main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.

283111 - 11




A. Field tests shall be witnessed by Architect, authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspectcomponents, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assistin testing.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentationthat is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the"Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter.

b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the"Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's writteninstructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's writteninstructions.

5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's writteninstructions.

6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record ofCompletion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems"Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added orreplaced devices and appliances.

F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly,quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm systemcomplying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed forinitial tests and inspections.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

283111 - 12



A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel toadjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.


31 1000 - 1 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OK Project No. N14023 MSTR 05/08 SITE CLEARING

SECTION 31 1000 BWA

SITE CLEARING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Removal of surface debris. 2. Removal of trees, shrubs, and other plants indicated. 3. Removal of sod indicated.

B. Related Documents:

1. The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 00 7213 - General Conditions and modifications thereto, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.

C. Related Sections:

1. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Topsoil removal. 1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Conform to applicable regulations relating to environmental requirements, disposal of debris, and use of herbicides.

B. Coordinate clearing work with utility companies.

C. Protect utilities to remain from damage.

D. Protect trees, plants, and other features designated to remain as final landscaping.

E. Protect bench marks, survey control points, and existing structures from damage or

displacement. PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Section 01 7300 - Execution: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Stake and flag locations of known utilities before starting any site clearing work.

31 1000 - 2 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OK Project No. N14023 MSTR 05/08 SITE CLEARING

a. Contact Oklahoma One Call System at (800) 522-6543 for utility company location of existing lines on or adjacent to Project site.

2. Verify that existing plants designated to remain are tagged or identified. 3. Identify a waste area and salvage area for placing removed materials.

C. Report in writing to Architect prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory

execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

D. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for

correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.2 CLEARING

A. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of Work.

B. Remove trees, shrubs, and stumps within marked areas or indicated.

C. Remove roots to a depth of 18 inches.

D. Clear undergrowth and deadwood without disturbing subsoil.

E. Apply herbicide to remaining stumps to inhibit growth. Use type of herbicide approved by the local office of the County Extension Agent or local authority having jurisdiction.

F. Remove existing sod where indicated without disturbing topsoil.

3.3 CONSERVATION OF TOPSOIL

A. After clearing, strip existing topsoil to 6 inch depth or to base of organic soil.

B. Stockpile topsoil in designated clear area of new construction. 1. Provide protection from contamination by subsoil. 2. Do not obstruct natural flow of drainage.

C. Maintain topsoil free from debris.

D. Maintain topsoil in damp condition.

1. Do not permit topsoil to dry out. 3.4 REMOVAL

A. Remove debris from site on a daily basis. Deposit materials in landfill or disposal area approved by authority having jurisdiction for types of materials removed.

B. Burning not permitted.

END OF SECTION

31 2200 - 1 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OKProject No. N14023 MSTR 0513 GRADING

SECTION 31 2200 BWA N14023 GRADING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Removal and storage of topsoil. 2. Rough grading site for site structures and building pads. 3. Finish grading.




1. Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing: Removal of site debris. 2. Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill: Filling and compaction. 3. Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfill: Trenching and backfilling for utilities

outside of building. 4. Section 31 3216 - Excavation: Excavation for building, footings and utilities within

building. 1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM D 2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in

Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Requirements for closeout submittals.

B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of utilities remaining by horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts, and slope gradients.


A. Perform Work in accordance with local authority having jurisdiction standards. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Protect above- and below-grade utilities that remain.

B. Protect plants, lawns, plants, and other features to remain as a portion of final landscaping.

C. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Topsoil: 1. Excavated On-Site:

a. Graded. b. Free of roots, rocks larger than 1/2 inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds and

foreign material. 2. Imported Borrow:

a. Friable loam. b. Free of roots, rocks larger than 1/2 inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds and

foreign material. c. Acidity range (pH): 5.0 to 7.0. d. Inorganic Matter: Minimum 6 percent and maximum 25 percent.

B. Other Fill Materials: Specified in Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.




correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.

B. Stake and flag locations of known utilities before starting any grading or excavating work. 1. Contact Oklahoma One Call System at (800) 522-6543 for utility company location of

existing lines on or adjacent to Project site.

C. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain, from damage. 3.3 ROUGH GRADING

A. Remove topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded, without mixing with foreign materials.

B. Do not remove topsoil when wet.


C. Remove subsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded.

D. Do not remove wet subsoil, unless it is subsequently processed to obtain optimum moisture content.

E. When excavating through roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe.

F. Refer to Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill for filling procedures.

G. Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil to same requirements as for specified fill.

3.4 SOIL REMOVAL AND STOCKPILING

A. Stockpile excavated topsoil on site.

B. Stockpile excavated subsoil on site.

C. Stockpiles: Use areas designated on site; pile depth not to exceed 8 feet; protect from erosion.

3.5 FINISH GRADING

A. Before Finish Grading: 1. Verify building and trench backfilling have been inspected. 2. Verify sub-grade has been contoured and compacted.

B. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 1/2 inch in size. Remove soil

contaminated with petroleum products.

C. Where topsoil is to be placed, scarify surface to depth of 3 inches.

D. In areas where vehicles or equipment have compacted soil, scarify surface to depth of 3 inches.

E. Place topsoil in areas where sodding is indicated.

F. Place topsoil where required to level finish grade.

G. Place topsoil to nominal depth of 4 inches.

H. Place topsoil during dry weather.

I. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading.

J. Near plants spread topsoil manually to prevent damage.

K. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain profiles and contour

of subgrade.

L. Slope finish grade of topsoil away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 feet, unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope slope into level areas.

M. Lightly compact placed topsoil.


3.6 COMPACTING

A. Compacting for building area sub-grade pad specified in Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill.

B. Compact soil to the minimum percentage density in accordance with ASTM D 2922 for the following areas: 1. Pavements and Sidewalks: Compact the top 8 inches of subgrade to 95 percent

optimum density with moisture content between 1 percent below and 2 percent above optimum moisture content.

2. Sodded and Unpaved Areas: Compact the top 8 inches of subgrade to 90 percent optimum density.

3.7 TOLERANCES

A. Top Surface of Sub-grade: Plus or minus 1/10 foot from required elevation.

B. Top Surface of Finish Grade: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor field quality control inspections. 1. Inspect grading operations, compaction, rough and finish grading. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and

Inspection Reports. 3. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and

Inspection Reports. 4. Test and Inspection Reports shall be available to Architect upon request.

B. Section 01 4523 - Testing Laboratory Services: Refer to Section 31 2324 – Fill and Backfill

for compaction density testing.

C. Correct deficiencies in products and installation found not to be in compliance with Contract Documents.

3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove unused stockpiled topsoil and subsoil. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing water.

B. Leave site clean and raked, ready to receive sodding.

END OF SECTION

31 2314 - 1 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OKProject No. N14023 MSTR 0513 BUILDING AREA SUBGRADE PAD PREPARATION

SECTION 31 2314 BWA N14023 BUILDING AREA SUBGRADE PAD PREPARATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Building areas subgrade preparation requirements and procedures.



2. Geotechnical Report: Geotechnical Engineer-of-Record observations and recommendations.


1. Section 01 4523 - Testing Laboratory Services: Testing requirements. 2. Section 01 4525 - Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Services: Geotechnical

Engineer inspections. 3. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Rough grading. 4. Section 31 3216 - Excavation: Excavating for rough grading.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM D 698 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using

Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Geotechnical Engineer-of-Record: Professional geotechnical engineer, licensed in the State where Project is located, who prepared the Geotechnical Report for this specific project containing observation and soils test recommendations, and recommendations for subsurface soil preparation for paving, building foundation and building slab. 1. Geotechnical Engineer-of-Record information indicated on cover page of Project

Manual and within Geotechnical Report located at end of Project Manual.

B. Building Area Sub-grade Pad: Portion of site directly beneath and within a line 5 feet beyond building line indicated on Drawings.

C. Finish Grade Elevations: Indicated on Drawings.

D. Sub-grade Pad Elevation: Finish grade indicated on Drawings minus building slab and

granular fill mat thickness. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.


B. Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Test and Inspection Reports: Submit the following test and inspection reports in

conformance with Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services and Section 01 4525 - Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Services. a. Compaction density testing and evaluations. b. Geotechnical Inspection Engineer inspections.


A. Backfill Placement Qualifications: Company specializing in the Work of this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience.

B. Pre-Installation Meeting: Building Area Subgrade Pad and Structural Fill.

1. Convene one week before starting Work of this Section as specified in Section 01 3100 - Project Management and Coordination.

2. Require attendance of Geotechnical Inspection Engineer, Independent Testing Laboratory Soils Inspector, Project Field Superintendent, Grading Contractor and other parties directly affecting Work of this Section.

3. Review conditions of installation, installation procedures and coordination with related work.

4. Agenda: a. Tour, inspect and discuss condition of site soil conditions, building subgrade

pad location and other preparatory work performed by other trades. b. Geotechnical Inspection Engineer to review and discuss results and

recommendations contained in Geotechnical Report. c. Review building area sub-grade pad excavation requirements. d. Review structural fill material requirements. e. Review foundation system requirements (drawings, specifications and other

contract documents), including OSHA safety requirements. f. Review structural fill placement methods and equipment. g. Review and finalize construction schedule related to pier work and verify

availability of materials, installer's personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

h. Review required inspections, testing and certifying procedures by Independent Testing Laboratory and Geotechnical Inspection Engineer.

I. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with rain, wet and unfavorable conditions.

j. Review safety precautions relating to excavation and structural fill placement. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FILL MATERIALS

A. Specified in Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION



B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. 2. See Section 31 2200 - Grading for additional requirements. 3. Determine actual groundwater levels at start of earthwork operations.





A. Prior to placement of fill in Building Area, Geotechnical Inspection Engineer to inspect and Independent Testing Agency to evaluate moisture content of exposed soils and make recommendations.

3.3 BUILDING AREA SUBGRADE PAD

A. Geotechnical Engineer-of-Record shall inspect existing soil to determine locations where removal of unsuitable and expansive soil is required.

B. Conduct pre-installation meeting as specified in this Section.

C. Perform earthwork for Building Area Sub-grade Pad when weather is dry. Earthwork not

permitted during rain or when soil is wet. After rain, allow soil to dry thoroughly before performing earthwork operations.

D. Prepare Building Area Sub-grade Pad in accordance with Notes indicated on Structural

Drawings, requirements of Geotechnical Report and specified herein. 1. Excavate or fill to depth required to provide Structural Fill layer 48 inches in thickness

below building area sub-grade pad elevation at as indicated on Drawings.

E. Areas Exposed by Excavation: 1. Scarify areas exposed by excavation to minimum 24 inch depth. Disk or blade until

sub-grade is uniform and free of large clods or chunks. 2. Compact to minimum 95 percent optimum density in accordance with ASTM D 698 at

minimum moisture content 2 percent below and maximum 2 percent above optimum moisture content. a. Compact granular fill and structural fill with a vibratory smooth drum roller

having a minimum drum size of 60 inches. b. If water must be added, it should be uniformly applied and thoroughly mixed

into the soil by disking or scarifying. 3. Proof-roll to detect any areas of insufficient compaction by making minimum 2

complete passes with moderately-loaded 25-ton dump truck, or Independent Testing Agency approved equivalent, in each of two perpendicular directions.

4. Excavate and recompact areas failing to meet specified requirements.

F. Backfilling: 1. Verify that structural fill is tested and approved.


2. Verify that backfill areas are free of debris, snow, ice, or water and that ground surfaces are not frozen.

G. Fill Placement: Place in 9 inch maximum lifts of loose material compacted minimum 95

percent optimum density in accordance with ASTM D 698 at minimum moisture content of 2 percent below and maximum moisture content 2 percent above optimum moisture content.

H. Granular Fill Mat Placement: Place granular base over building area subgrade pad under

building floor slab on grade. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect fill placement operations and compaction. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and


B. Section 01 4525 - Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Services: Perform geotechnical

inspections. 1. Inspection of building area sub-grade pad excavation and sub-grade pad area

preparation before start of fill placement. 2. Inspection of areas exposed by excavation that will receive structural fill. 3. Inspection of structural fill placement. 4. Inspection of granular fill mat placement.

C. Section 01 4523 - Testing Laboratory Services: Specified in Section 31 2324 - Fill and

Backfill.

D. Correct deficiencies in products and installation found not to be in compliance with Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION

31 2316 - 1 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OKProject No. N14023 MSTR 0710 EXCAVATION - SPREAD AND CONTINUOUS FOOTINGS

SECTION 31 2316 BWA N14023 EXCAVATION - SPREAD AND CONTINUOUS FOOTINGS PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Building foundation spread and continuous footings. 2. Footing excavations 3. Placing reinforcing 4. Placing concrete.




1. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Preparation and submittal of field inspection and testing reports.

2. Section 01 4523 - Testing Laboratory Services: Testing laboratory inspection requirements.

3. Section 01 4525 - Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Services: Geotechnical Engineer inspection requirements.

4. Section 03 0586 - Vapor Barrier: Vapor barrier installed at footings. 5. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcement: Reinforcing for foundations and

footings. 6. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete for foundations and footings. 7. Section 31 2314 - Building Area Sub-grade Pad: Building pad requirements. 8. Section 31 3216 - Excavation: Requirements for excavations.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting. 3. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting. 4. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. 5. ACI 311 - Manual of Concrete Inspection. 6. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM D 698 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).

2. ASTM D 2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

1.3 SUBMITTALS



B. Assurance/Control Submittals:

1. Inspection Reports: Submit the following inspection reports directly to Architect. Prepare in conformance with Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services and Section 01 4525 - Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Services. a. Testing Laboratory: Compaction testing, inspections and footing log. b. Geotechnical Inspection Engineer inspections.


A. Perform work of this Section in accordance with ACI 301, ACI 305R, ACI 306R, ACI 309, ACI 311 and ACI 318.

1.5 SEQUENCING

A. Schedule footing excavations to allow placement of reinforcing and concrete immediately after excavations and forms are completed and inspected.


A. Reinforcing: Specified in Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcement.

B. Concrete: Specified in Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

C. Forms: Specified in Section 03 1100 - Concrete Forming. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.




correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Perform footing excavations when weather is dry. Footing excavation not permitted during rain or when soil is wet. After rain, allow soil to dry thoroughly before performing footing excavations.


B. Specified in Section 31 3216 - Excavation. Remove existing fill, soft soils and expansive soils to level of stiff or dense soil as directed by Geotechnical Inspection Engineer.

C. Spread and continuous footings shall extend to and penetrate bearing materials as

indicated on Drawings.

D. Exposed sub-grade soils shall be examined in field by Geotechnical Inspection Engineer to verify strength and bearing capacity of soils.

E. Excavations and footings shall be size and shape as indicated on Drawings. Bottom of

each excavation shall be level, undisturbed, free of water, caving material or any other foreign substance.

F. Footing excavation shall remain open maximum 36 hours after completion of excavation.

Obtain Geotechnical Inspection Engineer approval for footing excavations that will remain open longer than 36 hours.

G. If concrete is not to be placed within 36 hours after completion of excavation, a 3 inch lean

concrete "working mat" may be required placed over bearing surface of exposed subgrade soils. "Working mat" shall not extend above bottom elevation of spread or continuous footing. “Working Mat” concrete shall have same compressive strength as concrete footings. Coordinate and obtain direction from Geotechnical Inspection Engineer and Structural Engineer.

3.3 FORMS

A. Form footings as specified in Section 03 1100 - Concrete Forming. Earth forms not permitted.

3.4 FABRICATION AND PLACING OF REINFORCING

A. Refer to Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcement.

B. All steel reinforcing mats shall be completely fabricated in a rigid fashion in order to permit expeditious placement into the excavation with a minimum time delay.

C. Accurately place reinforcement in excavations, maintaining specified coverage. Secure to

prevent displacement during concrete placement. 3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Refer to Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

B. Remove loose soil in footing excavation before placing concrete.

C. All concrete shall be placed so as to prevent segregation. Do not allow concrete to free fall over 5 feet 0 inches; provide tremie, chutes or other means of conveyance when drop exceeds this amount.

D. Concrete shall be placed as soon as practical after the excavation has been completed.


3.6 CONSTRUCTION

A. Interface with Other Work: 1. Coordinate installation of vapor barrier at footings. Vapor barrier specified in Section

03 0586 - Vapor Barrier.

B. Site Tolerances: Installation shall conform to the following. 1. Maximum Lateral Variation from Centerlines: 2 inches. 2. Plan Dimensions: Plus 3 inches, minus 1/2 inch. 3. Thickness: No smaller than scheduled sizes. 4. Top of Footing Elevation: Plus 0 inches, minus 3 inches.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect footing excavation and verify locations, dimensions, configurations and site

tolerances. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and


B. Section 01 4523 - Testing Laboratory Services: Perform testing and inspection services.

1. Inspection: Testing Laboratory shall inspect each concrete wall and column footing excavation to determine that proper bearing stratum is obtained and utilized for bearing and that excavations are properly clean, dry and meet site tolerances before placing concrete.

2. Footing Log: Provide complete footing log showing location, elevation of top of bearing stratum, footing size and depth, condition of material, excavation properly clean and dry before placing concrete, reinforcement in compliance with the Contract Documents and any and all observed irregularities, deficiencies or deviations from the Contract Documents.

3. Compaction Tests: Perform 1 test for compaction per every 50 lineal feet of footing open trench in accordance with ASTM D 2922 or as directed by Geotechnical Inspection Engineer. a. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing

uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor). b. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work,

replace and retest. 4. Reports: Prepare and submit reports indicating results of inspections and tests made

as specified in Section 01 4500 - Quality Control.

C. Section 01 4525 - Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Services: Perform geotechnical inspections. 1. Inspect footing excavations to verify strength and bearing capacity of soils before

reinforcing steel placement and concrete. 2. Reports: Prepare and submit reports indicating results of inspections made as

specified in Section 01 4500 - Quality Control.

END OF SECTION

31 2324 - 1 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OK Project No. N14023 MSTR 05/08 FILL AND BACKFILL

SECTION 31 2324 BWA FILL AND BACKFILL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Filling, backfilling, and compacting for building below grade, footings, slabs-on-grade

and site structures. 2. Building Area Sub-grade Pad preparation.

B. Work Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section:

1. Fill material under Slab-On-Grade concrete floor.

C. Related Documents: 1. The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 00 7213 - General Conditions and

modifications thereto, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.

2. Geotechnical Report: Geotechnical Engineer observations and recommendations.

D. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 4523 - Testing Laboratory Services: Testing requirements. 2. Section 01 4525 - Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Services: Geotechnical

Engineer inspections. 3. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Placement of granular mat below building

slab-on-grade concrete. 4. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Rough grading. 5. Section 31 3216 - Excavation: Excavating for rough grading. 6. Section 31 2314 - Building Area Subgrade Pad Preparation: Building pad

preparation requirements and procedures. 7. Section 31 2333 - Trenching for Site Utilities: Trenching for utilities outside the

building. 8. Section 31 3200 - Soil Stabilization: Pavement subgrade stabilization. 9. Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Pavement: Asphalt pavement and base. 10. Section 32 1313 - Concrete Pavement: Concrete pavement and base

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 2. ASTM D 698 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using

Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). 3. ASTM D 2487 - Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified

Soil Classification System). 4. ASTM D 2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in

Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 1.3 SUBMITTALS



B. Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Test and Inspection Reports: Submit the following test and inspection reports in

conformance with Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services. a. Compaction density testing and evaluations.


A. Backfill Placement Qualifications: Company specializing in the Work of this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience.


A. Provide sufficient quantities of fill to meet project schedule and requirements. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need.

B. When fill materials need to be stored on site, locate stockpiles where indicated.

1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing.

2. Prevent contamination. 3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials.

C. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FILL MATERIALS

A. General Fill: Subsoil excavated on-site. 1. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris. 2. Conforming to ASTM D 2487, Group Symbol GW, GM, GC, SW, SP, SM, CL and

ML.

B. Structural Fill: Inspected and approved by Independent Testing Laboratory. 1. Low volume change cohesive soil with liquid limit less than 35, a plasticity index

between 5 and 15. 2. Graded, containing at least 15 percent fines (material passing the No. 200 sieve,

based on dry weight). 3. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris. 4. Sandy Clays conforming to ASTM D 2487, Group Symbol SC or Clayey Sands

conforming to ASTM D 2487, Group Symbol CL.

C. Granular Fill Mat Under Floor Slab: Inspected and approved by Independent Testing Laboratory. 1. Gravel, free of sharp corners or edges, natural stone; washed, free of clay, shale,

organic matter; 1/4 inch minimum size, 5/8 inch maximum size.

D. Aggregate Fill: Clean crushed concrete aggregate conforming to ASTM C 33.

E. Limestone Screening Fill: Inspected and approved by Independent Testing Laboratory.


1. Non-expansive with plasticity index less than 12.

F. Gray Shale Fill: Inspected and approved by Independent Testing Laboratory. 1. Non-expansive with plasticity index less than 18. 2. Conforming to ASTM D 2487, Group Symbol CL.

G. Concrete for Fill: As specified in Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete; compressive

strength of 3000 psi. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. 2. See Section 31 2200 - Grading for additional requirements. 3. Determine actual groundwater levels at start of earthwork operations.





A. Prior to placement of fill in Building Area, Geotechnical Engineer-of-Record to inspect and Independent Testing Agency to evaluate moisture content of exposed soils and make recommendations.

B. Proof roll exposed subgrade with moderately loaded dump truck.

C. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with structural

fill.

D. Scarify subgrade surface to a depth of 18 inches to identify soft spots.

E. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material.

F. Until ready to fill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation.

3.3 FILLING

A. Fill up to subgrade elevations unless otherwise indicated.

B. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.


C. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous,

wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.

D. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.

E. General Fill: Place and compact material in equal continuous layers not exceeding 9 inches of loose material.

F. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 feet, unless noted otherwise.

Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas.

G. Correct areas that are over-excavated. 1. Load-Bearing Foundation Surfaces: Use structural fill, flush to required elevation and

compaction. 2. Other areas: Use general fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to minimum 95

percent of maximum dry density and moisture content between 3 percent below and 3 percent above optimum moisture content.

H. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated:

1. Under concrete paving, site concrete slabs-on-grade, and similar construction: 95 percent of maximum dry density and moisture content between 3 percent below and 3 percent above optimum moisture content.

2. Compact using a vibratory sheeps foot having a minimum drum size of 60 inches.

I. Compaction Density for Utility Trenches within Building Area Subgrade Pad Area: 1. 98 percent of maximum dry density and moisture content between 3 percent below

and 3 percent above optimum moisture content. 2. Compact using a vibratory sheeps foot having a minimum drum size of 60 inches.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect fill placement operations and compaction. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and


B. Section 01 4525 - Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Services: Perform geotechnical

inspections. 1. Inspection of areas exposed by excavation that will receive structural fill. 2. Inspection of structural fill placement.

C. Section 014 523 - Testing Laboratory Services: Perform the following tests and

inspections. 1. Inspection and approval of structural fill material. 2. Determine actual groundwater levels at start of earthwork operations. 3. Perform compaction density testing on compacted fill in accordance with ASTM D

2922. 4. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted

material in accordance with ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor).


5. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest.

6. Frequency of Tests: a. For structural fill areas at Building Area Subgrade Pad: One (1) per every lift of

fill per 1000 square feet, minimum one (1) tests. b. For structural fill areas at Paved Areas: One (1) per every lift of fill per 5000

square feet, minimum one (1) tests.


3.5 CLEAN-UP

A. Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water.

END OF SECTION

31 2333 - 1 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OKProject No. N14023 MSTR 1111 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL

SECTION 31 2333 BWA N14023 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections.




1. Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services: Compaction testing. 2. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Site grading. 3. Section 31 3216 - Excavation: Building and foundation excavating. 4. Section 31 2324 Fill and Backfill: Filling and backfilling 5. Division 23 and 26: Additional excavation and backfill requirements.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM D 698 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using

Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). 2. ASTM D 2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in

Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finish Grade Elevations: Indicated on Drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Provide protection for workers within trench areas in accordance with local, state and

federal Occupational Safety and Health requirements and regulations. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Provide sufficient quantities of fill to meet project schedule and requirements. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need.

B. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.

C. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving,

and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FILL MATERIALS

A. Fill: Specified in Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill. 2.2 TRACE TAPE

A. Detectable tape, 3 inch wide with aluminum foil core encased in polyethylene plastic jacket with large letters permanently marked.

B. Color and markings as required by the American Public Works Association as follows,

unless otherwise required by local authority having jurisdiction. 1. Red: Electrical lines; mark “CAUTION ELECTRIC SERVICE.” 2. Yellow: Gas lines; mark “CAUTION GAS SERVICE.” 3. Blue: Water lines; mark “CAUTION WATER SERVICE.” 4. Green: Sewer or storm drain lines; mark “CAUTION SEWER SERVICE.” 5. Orange: Telephone, television or communications lines; mark “CAUTION

TELEPHONE SERVICE.” PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 7300 - Execution Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and

conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. 2. Refer to Section 31 2200 - Grading for additional requirements.





A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.

B. Stake and flag locations of known utilities before starting any excavating work. 1. Contact Oklahoma One Call System at (800) 522-6543 for utility company location of

existing lines on or adjacent to Project site. 2. Protect utility lines from damage.

C. Refer to Section 31 2200 - Grading for additional requirements.


3.3 TRENCHING

A. Notify Architect and Owner’s Representative of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work.

B. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored.

C. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.

D. Cut trenches as indicated on Drawings and wide enough to allow inspection of installed

utilities.

E. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter.

F. Remove large stones and other hard material which could damage piping or impede consistent backfilling or compaction.

G. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site.

H. Stockpile excavated material to be re-used in area designated on site in accordance with

Section 31 2200 - Grading.

I. Remove excess excavated material from site.

J. Refer to Division 23 and 26. 3.4 PREPARATION FOR UTILITY PLACEMENT

A. Cut out soft areas of sub-grade not capable of compaction in place.

B. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material.

C. Until ready to backfill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into

excavation. 3.5 BACKFILL

A. Backfill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials.

B. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.

C. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy sub-grade surfaces.

D. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.

E. Gravel: Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers not exceeding 6 inches

loose material.

F. Fill: Place and compact material in equal continuous layers not exceeding 9 inches loose materials.


G. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 feet, unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas.

H. Correct areas that are over-excavated.

1. Thrust bearing surfaces: Fill with concrete. 2. Other areas: Use general fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to minimum 95

percent of maximum dry density.

I. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated: 95 percent of maximum dry density and moisture content between 2 percent below and 2 percent above the optimum moisture content.

J. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.

K. Install continuous trace tape 6 inches above top of pipe.

L. Refer to Division 23 and 26.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect trenching operations, fill placement, fill type and compaction density. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and


B. Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services: Perform the following tests.

1. Compaction density testing on compacted fill in accordance with ASTM D 2922. 2. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing un-compacted

material in accordance with ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor). 3. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace

and retest. 4. Frequency of Tests:

1. For backfill areas at Paved Areas: 1 for each two (2) feet of backfill for each 200 lineal feet, or portion, of trenching.

C. Correct deficiencies in products and installation found not to be in compliance with Contract

Documents. 3.7 CLEAN-UP

A. Leave unused materials in a neat, compact stockpile.

B. Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water.

END OF SECTION

31 2500 - 1 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OK Project No. N14023 MSTR 05/08 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

SECTION 31 2500 BWA EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Temporary and permanent erosion control systems. 2. Slope protection systems. 3. Stormwater pollution prevention plan.




1. Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing: Removal of trees, shrubs and other plants. 2. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Rough grading.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): 1. NPDES - National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System.

B. Oklahoma Department of Transportation (ODOT):

1. ODOT - State of Oklahoma Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, Section 735 - Material for Roadside Development and Erosion Control.


A. Perform Work in accordance with the following ODOT standards: 1. Section 220 - Temporary Erosion, Sedimentation and Stormwater Pollution

Prevention and Control. 2. Section 223 - Temporary Silt Fence. 3. Section 224 - Temporary Sediment Control Filters. 4. Section 226 - Temporary Sediment Removal. 5. Section 230 - Sodding and Sprigging.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to requirements of local Authority Having Jurisdiction

for prevention of erosion and sediment control. 1. Conform to NPDES requirements where required.


A. Environmental Requirements: Protect adjacent properties and water resources from erosion and sediment damage throughout Work. Take all necessary measures to prevent


sedimentation from construction operations to enter adjacent property. Offsite discharge of sedimentation is not permitted.

B. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan: Maintain plan at Project site at all times available for

inspection during contract duration. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Quick Growing Grasses: Wheat, rye, or oats.

B. Rock Bags

C. Fencing for Siltation Control: UV resistant geotextile fabric.

D. Slab Sod: Rectangular slabs of Bermuda grass.

E. Temporary Mulches: Loose straw, netting, wood cellulose, or agricultural silage free of seed.



B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.




correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.2 EROSION CONTROL AND SLOPE PROTECTION

A. Provide erosion control and slope protection measures to prevent sediment from site entering adjacent property or public right-of-way to include but not be limited to: 1. Temporary silt fences. 2. Rock bags placed in drainage channels and swales 3. Diked area with earth berm and silt trap for draining dredged material.

B. Install erosion control and slope protection in accordance with ODOT standards.

C. Place all erosion and siltation control measures before start of earthwork and grading

construction operations.


D. Mulch and seed all storm and sanitary sewer trenches not in streets no later than 10 days after backfill. Do not permit more than 500 feet of trench to be open at any one time.

E. Place all excavated material on uphill side of trenches where possible. Do not place

materials in stream beds. Seed any stockpiled material which remains in place longer than 30 days with temporary vegetation and mulch.

F. Mulch and seed all temporary earth berms, diversions, erosion barriers and temporary

stockpiles with temporary vegetative cover with 10 days after grading. G. Do not stockpile or otherwise place dreged, excavated or other material, at any time, in or

near stream bed which may increase turbidity of water. If turbidity producing materials are present, hold surface drainage from cuts and fills within construction area and from borrow and waste disposal areas in suitable sedimentation ponds or grade surface drainage to control erosion within acceptable limits. Provide and maintain temporary erosion and sediment control measures such as berms, dikes, drains, or sedimentation basins, if required, until permanent damage and erosion control facilities are completed and operative. Hold to minimum area of bare soil exposed at any one time by construction operations.

H. Drain dredged material minimum 7 days. Store material for drainage to maximum 4 foot

height. I. Owner’s Representative may direct Contractor to limit surface area of erodible earth

material exposed by clearing and grubbing, excavation, borrow and embankment operations and may direct Contractor to provide immediate permanent or temporary erosion control measures.

J. Maintain temporary erosion control systems as directed by Owner’s Representative to

control siltation during construction. Provide maintenance or additional Work directed by Owner’s Representative immediately upon notification by Owner’s Representative.

3.3 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWP3)

A. SWP3: Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan located at end of Project Manual. Owner Representative and Contractor shall comply with all requirements contained in the SWP3.

B. Construction General Permit Requirements: Owner Representative and Contractor shall

complete, certify, sign and submit executed Plan to the Oklahoma Department of Environmental Quality and obtain a NPDES Construction General Permit for this Project. 1. Permit: NPDES Construction General Permit required before any earthwork

activities start. 2. Complete and Insert Data for Appendix D: Insert the following into the SWP3

Appendix D location before execution and signature of the SWP3 by Owner Representative and Contractor and before Submittal to State of Oklahoma Department of Environmental Quality for permit. a. Contractor shall include a copy of the Overall Construction Progress Schedule. b. Contractor shall include description of Contractor's Temporary Support

Facilities and Plan for location of Contractor's Temporary Storage and Staging Areas.

C. Inspection and Maintenance Report Submittals:


1. Contractor shall prepare and submit a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan Inspection Report and Maintenance Report Form to Oklahoma Department of Environmental Quality in conformance with the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan and Construction General Permit as follows: a. Every seven (7) calendar days during construction operations. b. Within 24 hours of a rainfall event of 0.5 inches or more.

2. Submit on the attached “Inspection and Maintenance Report Form” following this Section.

3. Refer to SWP3 for other submittals and requirements for this Project.

END OF SECTION


Replace this Page with a Copy of a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan

Inspection Report (Inspection Report is included in the Stormwater Pollution

Prevention Plan)

31 3116 - 1 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OKProject No. N14023 MSTR 05/08 TERMITE CONTROL

SECTION 31 3116 BWA N14023 TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Chemical soil treatment for termites at building foundation and slabs on grade.




1. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Preparation and submittal of field application reports.

2. Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill: Building area sub-grade pad. 1.2 REFERENCES

A. United States Code (USC): 1. USC (Title 7) - Title 7, 136 through 136y - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and

Rodenticide Act. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's data and installation instructions. 2. Application Plan: Indicate proposed sequence of treatment in relation to footing and

slab placement. Include termiticide trade name, EPA registration number, State Certification Number (if applicable), chemical composition, formulation, concentration of original and diluted material, application rate of active ingredients, method of application, area/volume treated, amount applied. Include name and State license number of State Certified Applicator.

3. Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Application Report: Submit report for application of toxicant directly to

Architect at completion of application of toxicant for each building containing the following. Prepare reports in conformance with Section 01 4500 - Quality Control 1) Date and location of application (include building number if more than

one (1) building). 2) Soil moisture meter readings. Wind speed readings. 3) Method of application for horizontal barrier and vertical barrier. 4) Toxicant type, concentration of original and diluted material, application

rate. 5) Area and volume treated. 6) Total amount used.

b. Agency Approvals: Indicate regulatory agency approval reports when required.


c. Qualification Documentation: Submit documentation of State Applicator License, Certification and experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements.

d. Manufacturer Instructions (For Information): Submit manufacturer's published installation instructions for specific products specified attached to Product Data.

B. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Procedures for closeout submittals.

1. Maintenance Data: Provide annual inspection and re-treatment schedule. 2. Warranty: Submit three (3) original copies of manufacturer warranty with forms

completed in Owner’s name and registered with manufacturer and signed by Owner when required.

3. Installation Certification: Submit written certification of installation on form located at end of Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing this type of work and: 1. Having minimum of five (5) years documented experience. 2. Approved by manufacturer of treatment materials. 3. Oklahoma Licensed Pesticide Applicator certified by the Oklahoma Department of

Agriculture.

B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to applicable State and local regulations for requirements for application,

and comply with EPA regulations and USC (Title 7) requirements.

C. Manufacturer Installation Instructions: Contractor shall maintain current copy of pre-treat termiticide manufacturer published application instructions in Project Field Office and refer to application instructions at all times during application.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Transport, handle, store, and protect Products.

B. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. Labels shall indicate EPA registration number and manufacturer's registered uses.

C. Accept Products on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage. Return

damaged Products and replace with undamaged Products.

D. Deliver Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each material to Project Field Superintendent for Contractor Records.

E. Project Field Superintendent shall inspect Products immediately upon delivery to Project

Site, determine Product conformance with specified requirements and reject Products not complying with specifications. Project Field Superintendent shall direct that non-complying Products be removed from Project Site immediately.

F. Store materials in designated areas and in accordance with manufacturer's labels

Toxicants and related materials shall be kept in a locked storage area when unattended. Protect toxicant from sunlight.


G. Handle toxicant in accordance with manufacturer's labels. Follow manufacturer's warning

and precautions. Prevent contamination by dirt, water and organic material. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Test soils to be treated immediately before application. Test soil moisture content to

minimum depth of 3 inches. 2. Soil moisture shall be as recommended by toxicant manufacturer. Application of

toxicant not permitted if soil moisture exceeds manufacturer recommendations. 3. Apply toxicant when weather is dry. Application of toxicant not permitted during rain

or when soil is wet. After rain, allow soil to dry thoroughly before applying toxicant. 4. Application of toxicant not permitted when average wind speed exceeds 10 miles per

hour. 1.7 WARRANTY

A. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Procedures for closeout submittals.

B. Provide five (5) year applicator warranty against damage to building caused by termites. 1. Warrant for infestations and re-infestations. 2. Include coverage for repairs to building and to contents damaged due to building

damage. Repair damage and, if required, re-treat. 3. Inspect annually and report in writing to Owner. Provide inspection service for five

(5) years from Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Toxicant Chemical: EPA approved Pre-Treat Termiticide; synthetically color dyed to permit visual identification of treated soil conforming to USC (Title 7) providing maximum effectiveness and duration after application, suitable for soil and climatic conditions at Project Site. 1. Product certified for use by Oklahoma Department of Agriculture.

B. Diluent: Recommended by toxicant manufacturer.

2.2 MIXES

A. Mix toxicant in conformance with manufacturer's published instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION




1. Verify that soil surfaces are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, and ready to receive treatment.

2. Verify final grading is complete.

C. Report in writing to Architect prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



A. Before each application, applicator shall notify Contractor and Project Field Superintendent of intended toxicant application, date, time and intended locations of application.

B. Project Field Superintendent shall notify all subcontractors and construction personnel to

leave area to be treated during application and until toxicant is absorbed into soil. 3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply toxicant in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and approved Application Plan. 1. Soil Treatment Applicator and Project Field Superintendent shall review and discuss

manufacturer’s published application instructions, applicable local, State and Federal Regulations and how they apply to Project conditions before start of installation.

2. Application shall conform to Oklahoma Department of Agriculture document “Minimum Residue Levels for Termiticides Applied to Soil” for horizontal and vertical application.

B. Apply toxicant to establish complete and unbroken vertical and horizontal barrier between

soil and all portions of building structure which may allow termite access to wood and wood related products.

C. Apply toxicant to prepared building subgrade pad before placement of granular mat and

vapor barrier.

D. Horizontal Barrier: 1. Apply toxicant using spray application method. Apply as a course spray; provide

uniform distribution over soil surface. 2. Toxicant shall penetrate minimum 1 inch into soil, or as recommended by

manufacturer.

E. Vertical Barrier: 1. Apply toxicant using trench and rod method. Trench along footing to depth of footing.

Trench need not be wider than 6 inches. 2. Space rod holes to achieve continuous toxicant barrier saturating base of trench,

maximum 12 inches on center. 3. Take precautions to prevent soil-wash-out around footing. 4. Immediately after toxicant has reached maximum penetration as recommended by

manufacturer, backfill trench. 5. Backfill and compact in 6 inch lifts. Treat each lift with toxicant.


6. When treating foundations deeper than 4 feet, apply toxicant as backfill is being replaced.

F. Apply additional toxicant to structure penetration surfaces such as pipes, conduits or ducts,

and soil penetrations such as grounding rods or posts.

G. Re-treat disturbed treated soil with same toxicant as original treatment.

H. If inspection or testing identifies the presence of termites, re-treat soil and re-test. 3.4 PLACEMENT OF GRANULAR MAT AND VAPOR BARRIER

A. Place granular mat and vapor barrier over treated soils as soon as toxicant has reached maximum penetration into soil. Time for maximum penetration recommended by manufacturer.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform field quality control inspections. 1. Inspect and test treated soil areas before covering with construction. Verify coverage

and application areas. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and


B. Correct deficiencies in products and installation found not to be in compliance with Contract

Documents. 3.6 CLEAN-UP AND DISPOSAL

A. Upon completion of application, clean-up and protect site immediately.

B. Remove all material associated with application of toxicant in conformance with manufacturer label instructions.

C. Remove and dispose of excess and waste material off site.

D. Dispose residual toxicant and containers off site in accordance with manufacturer label

instructions and EPA criteria. 3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Do not permit soil grading over treated work. 3.8 SOIL TREATMENT

A. Apply soil treatment for termite control at the following locations: 1. Under building slabs-on-grade - Horizontal Barrier. 2. Exterior side of foundation, footing and grade beam surface - Vertical Barrier. 3. Exterior side of foundation wall surface - Vertical Barrier.

END OF SECTION


SOIL TREATMENT FOR TERMITE CONTROL INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION PROJECT: New Elementary and High School LOCATION: 150 South First St., Mountain View, OK ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NUMBER: N14023 OWNER: Mountain View – Gotebo Public Schools CONTRACTOR: Fenix Constructors SOIL TREATMENT APPLICATOR:

Name: ___________________________________________________ Address: _________________________________________________

Telephone Number: ________________________________________

UPON COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION APPLICATOR CERTIFIES THAT: 1. Applicator obtained a current copy of the manufacturer's published installation instructions for the

specific product being applied. 2. Applicator reviewed and discussed manufacturer's published installation instructions for horizontal

barrier and vertical barrier application with Project Field Superintendent before start of application. 3. Applicator applied toxicant chemical under floor slab and at exterior side of foundation in

accordance with the Contract Documents, State and EPA regulations. 4. Applicator applied toxicant chemical in amounts conforming to Oklahoma Department of Agriculture

publication “Minimum Residue Levels for Termiticides Applied to Soil.” 5. Applicator applied additional toxicant chemical to structure penetration surfaces, pipes, conduits

and ducts per manufacturer's published instructions. 6. Applicator re-treated soil disturbed after original application. EXECUTED AND DELIVERED this _________________ day of ______________, 20___ . ________________________________________ (company name) BY: ____________________________________ (authorized signature) Subscribed and sworn to before me this ____________day of _____________, 20___. ________________________________________________ Notary Public _______________________________________________ Affix Seal My Commission expires:

END OF CERTIFICATION

31 3200 - 1 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OK Project No. N14023 MSTR 05/08 SOIL STABILIZATION

SECTION 31 3200 BWA SOIL STABILIZATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Soil stabilization for pavement sub-grade. 2. Excavating, treatment, and placement of cement subsoil mix. 3. Excavating, treatment, and placement of fly ash subsoil mix. 4. Excavating, treatment, and placement of lime treated subsoil mix.



2. Geotechnical Report: Pavement recommendations and construction considerations.

C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 4523 - Testing Laboratory Services: Testing requirements. 2. Section 01 4525 - Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Services: Geotechnical

Engineer inspections. 2. Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing: Stripping, clearing and grubbing. 3. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Rough grading for paving subgrde. 4. Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill: General site and building backfilling. 5. Section 31 3216 - Excavating: General site and building excavation. 6. Section 32 1216 – Asphalt Paving: Asphalt pavement placed over stabilized

subgrade. 7. Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving: Concrete pavement placed over stabilized

subgrade. 1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 2. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural

Pozzolan for Use as Mineral Admixture in Concrete. 3. ASTM C 977 - Standard Specification for Quicklime and Hydrated Lime for Soil

Stabilization. 4. ASTM D 1633 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Molded Soil-Cement

Cylinders. 5. ASTM D 5239 - Standard Practice for Characterizing Fly Ash for Use in Soil

Stabilization.

B. Oklahoma Department of Transportation (ODOT): 1. ODOT - State of Oklahoma Department of Transportation Standard Specification for

Highway Construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS


A. Finish Pavement Elevations: Indicated on Drawings.

B. Pavement Sub-grade Elevation: Finish grade indicated on Drawings minus paving

thickness. 1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Design Data: Submit mix design and materials mix ratio that will achieve specified

requirements. 2. Test Reports: Submit the following test and inspection reports in conformance with

Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services and Section 01 4525 - Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Services. a. Compression test and analysis. b. Geotechnical Engineer inspections.


A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not install mixed materials in wind in excess of 10 mph or when temperature is

below 40 degrees F. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MIX MATERIALS

A. Contractor Option: Use cement, fly ash or lime as stabilizing agent mix material.

B. Subsoil: Existing reused.

C. Cement: ASTM C 150, portland cement kilm dust.

D. Fly Ash: ASTM D 5239 AND ASTM C 618, Class C fly ash.

E. Lime: ASTM C 977. 2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Use equipment capable of excavating subsoil, mixing and placing materials, wetting, consolidating, and compacting material.

2.3 SOIL MIX

A. Mix subsoil fly ash in accordance with requirements of Geotechnical Report. 1. Exact amount determined by Geotechnical Engineer after final grades have been

developed.


B. Add water to the mix to achieve a homogeneous damp mixture without lumping, yet not creating a wet plastic consistency. 1. Cement: Refer to ODOT, Section 312.04, 1976 edition for mixing.

2. Fly Ash: Refer to ODOT, Section 317, current edition for mixing.

3. Lime: Refer to ODOT, Section 307, current edition for mixing.

C. Obtain Geotechnical Engineer approval of mix before proceeding with placement.



B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Do not backfill over frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.





A. Strip, clear and grub area to receive soil stabilization as specified in Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing.

B. Provide positive drainage away from area to receive soil stabilization and prevent water

from collecting or standing in area.

C. Determine moisture density relationship and immediate bearing value for untreated soil. 3.3 EXCAVATION

A. Protect adjacent structures from damage by work of this Section.

B. Excavate subsoil 6 inches below pavement sub-grade elevation.

C. Proof roll sub-grade to identify soft areas; excavate those areas.

D. Do not excavate within normal 45 degree bearing splay of any foundation.

E. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1/3 cubic yard measured by volume. Notify Geotechnical Engineer if larger rock is encountered.


F. Notify Geotechnical Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions. Discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work.

G. Correct areas over-excavated in accordance with Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill.

H. Stockpile excavated material in area designated on site; remove excess material not being

reused from site. 3.4 SOIL TREATMENT AND BACKFILLING

A. Site mix subsoil, backfill and compact. Blend treated subsoil mix to achieve mix formulation and required stabilization.

B. Place mix material in continuous layers not exceeding 9 inches depth.

C. Maintain optimum moisture content of mix materials to attain required stabilization. If more

than one layer, maintain lower layer at optimum moisture until next layer is placed.

D. Place mixed materials within 2-1/2 hours of adding water to mix.

E. Do not exceed 30 minutes in placing adjacent mixed material.

F. Commence compaction of mix no later than 30 minutes after placement.

G. Compact mix to ASTM D1633.

H. Shape to required line, grade, and cross section.

I. Make grade changes gradual. Blend slopes into level areas.

J. At end of day, terminate completed Work by forming a straight and vertical construction joint.

K. Replace damaged fill with new mix to full depth of original mix.

L. Remove surplus mix materials from site.

3.5 CURING

A. Immediately following compaction of mix, seal top surface with water fogging. 3.6 CONSTRUCTION

A. Site Tolerances: 1. Top Surface of Fill: Plus or minus one inch from required elevations.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect soil stabilization preparation, mixing, placement and compaction density.


2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and Inspection Reports.

3. Test and Inspection Reports shall be available to Architect upon request.

B. Section 01 4525 - Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Services: Perform geotechnical inspections. 1. Determine exact cement or fly ash mix quantity. 2. Inspection of areas exposed by excavation that will receive stabilized sub-grade. 3. Inspection of pavement sub-grade mixing. 4. Inspection of pavement sub-grade preparation before start of stabilized sub-grade

placement. 5. Inspection of stabilized sub-grade placement.

C. Section 01 4523 - Testing Laboratory Services: Perform the following tests:

1. Compression test and analysis of hardened fill material will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1633.

2. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner.

3. Frequency of Tests: 1 per every lift of fill per 5000 square feet; minimum 2 tests.


END OF SECTION

31 3216 - 1 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OK Project No. N14023 MSTR 05/08 EXCAVATION

SECTION 31 3216 BWA EXCAVATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Excavating for building, footings and slabs-on-grade. 2. Excavating for utilities within the building.




1. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Rough and finish grading. 2. Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill: Fill materials, filling, and compacting. 3. Section 31 2316 – Excavation - Spread and Continuous Footings: Building

foundation. 4. Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfill: Excavating for utility trenches outside the

building. 5. Section 31 6331 - Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts: Building foundation.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Building Area Sub-grade Pad: Portion of site directly beneath and within a line 5 feet beyond building line indicated on Drawings.

1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide protection for workers within trench areas in accordance with local and state Occupational Safety and Health requirements and in conformance with Occupational Safety and Health Administration regulations contained in U.S. Department of Labor, Standard 29 CFR, Part 1926 “Safety and Health Regulations for Construction” and Contractor’s Site Safety Program.


A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.

B. Protect plants, lawns, rock outcroppings, and other features to remain.

C. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Not Used.



B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as

indicated.




A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.

B. Stake and flag locations of known utilities before starting any grading or excavating work. 1. Contact Oklahoma One Call System at 811 for utility company location of existing

lines on or adjacent to Project site.

C. Locate depth of existing building foundations and footings by excavation of test pits prior to excavating.

D. See Section 31 2200 - Grading for additional requirements.

3.3 EXCAVATING

A. Strip and remove all vegetation, top soil, paving and any loose material below Building Area Subgrade Pad as specified in Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing. Scarify and compact as specified in Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill. Refer to Foundation and Excavation Notes on Structural Drawings.

B. Excavate to accommodate new structures and construction operations.

C. Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in

area until notified to resume work.

D. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored.

E. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.


F. Cut utility trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities.

G. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter.

H. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders and rock up to 1/3 cubic yard measured by volume. Notify Architect if larger rock is encountered.

I. Correct areas that are over-excavated and load-bearing surfaces that are disturbed; see

Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill.

J. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation. 1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. 2. Remove accumulated water in excavations. 3. Provide and maintain pumps, sumps, suction and discharge lines and other

dewatering system components required to remove water from excavations.

K. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site.

L. Stockpile excavated material to be re-used in area designated on site in accordance with Section 31 2200 - Grading.

M. Remove excess excavated material from site.

N. If it is required that footing excavations be left open for more than a 24 hour period, they

should be protected to reduce evaporation or entry of soil moisture. Water should not be allowed to collect near the foundations or floor slab areas.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect excavation operations, excavations for building foundations and utilities,

dimensions, depths and material stockpiles. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and


B. Correct deficiencies in products and installation found not to be in compliance with

Contract Documents. 3.5 PROTECTION

A. Prevent displacement of banks and keep loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability.

B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing.

END OF SECTION

32 1216 - 1 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OK Project No. N14023 MSTR 05/08 ASPHALT PAVING

SECTION 32 1216 BWA: ODOT ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Asphaltic concrete paving. 2. Aggregate base course.



2. Geotechnical Report: Geotechnical Engineer observations and recommendations.

C. Related Sections: 1. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Preparation of site for paving and base. 2. Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill: Compacted fill for paving subgrade. 3. Section 31 3200 - Soil Stabilization: Stabilized pavement subgrade. 4. Section 32 1723 - Pavement Markings: Markings and graphics.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM 698 - Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a

10-lb Rammer and an 18-in. Drop. 2. ASTM D 2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in

Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

B. Oklahoma Department of Transportation (ODOT): 1. ODOT - State of Oklahoma Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for

Highway Construction. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with ODOT standards. 1. Section 303 - Aggregate Base. 2. Section 401 - General Requirements for Surfaces. 3. Section 0411 - Plant mix Asphalt Concrete Pavement.

B. Qualifications:

1. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience.


A. Environmental Requirements:


1. Do not place asphalt when ambient air or base surface temperature is less than 50 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen.


A. Asphalt Paving: Paving type and thickness indicated on Drawings conforming to ODOT Section 411.

B. Base Course: Provide Type A aggregate base conforming to ODOT Section 303,

thickness indicated on Drawings.

C. Herbicide: Commercial non-selective soil sterilant chemical for weed control, registered by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Use type of herbicide approved by the local office of the County Externsion Agent or local authority having jurisdiction.



B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that compacted subgrade is dry and ready to support paving and imposed

loads. 2. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.




correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.2 STABILIZED SUBGRADE

A. Mix and place stabilized subgrade as specified in Section 31 3200 - Soil Stabilization and Geotechnical Report.

3.3 BASE COURSE

A. Place aggregate base course in accordance with ODOT requirements.

B. Apply herbicide to soil areas under aggregate base to inhibit growth of weeds. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended rates and published instructions. Apply to dry, prepared sub-grade surface before placement of aggregate base.

C. Spread aggregate over prepared subgrade to total thickness indicated.


D. Level and contour surfaces to elevations and gradients indicated on Drawings.

E. Add small quantities of fine aggregate to course aggregate as appropriate to assist

compaction.

F. Add water to assist compaction. If excess water is apparent, remove aggregate and aerate to reduce moisture content.

G. Use mechanical tamping equipment in areas inaccessible to compaction equipment.

3.4 PREPARATION - PRIMER

A. Apply primer in accordance with ODOT requirements.

B. Apply primer to contact surfaces of concrete paving and curbs.

C. Use clean sand to blot excess primer. 3.5 PREPARATION - TACK COAT

A. Apply tack coat in accordance with ODOT requirements.

B. Apply tack coat to contact surfaces of concrete paving and curbs. 3.6 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT

A. Place asphalt in accordance with ODOT requirements.

B. Place asphalt within 24 hours of applying primer or tack coat.

C. Place to compacted thickness indicated.

D. Compact pavement by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.

E. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish, without roller

marks.

F. Apply pavement markings as indicated on Drawings and specified in Section 321723 - Pavement Markings.

3.7 CONSTRUCTION

A. Site Tolerances: 1. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4 inch measured with 10 foot straight edge. 2. Compacted Thickness: Within 1/4 inch of specified or indicated thickness. 3. Variation from True Elevation: Within 1/2 inch. 4. No “duckponds” or other trapping of water permitted.



A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect bituminous concrete paving installation, type and quality of materials,

thickness of each course and application of seal coat. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and


B. Section 01 4523 - Testing Laboratory Services: Perform testing of base course as

specified in Section 01 4525 - Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Services and Geotechnical Report. 1. Perform compaction density testing on base course in accordance with ASTM D

2922. 2. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted

material in accordance with ASTM D 698 ("standard Proctor"). 3. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace

and retest. 4. Frequency of Tests: one (1) per every lift of fill per 1000 square feet.

C. Section 01 4525 - Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Services: Inspect base course

placement as specified in Section 01 4525 - Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Services and Geotechnical Report.

D. Correct deficiencies in products and installation found not to be in compliance with Contract

Documents. 3.9 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical injury until surface temperature is less than 140 degrees F.

END OF SECTION

32 1313 - 1 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OK Project No. N14023 MSTR 05/08 CONCRETE PAVING

SECTION 32 1313 BWA CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete pavement parking areas, and driveways. 2. Aggregate sub-grade base 2. Stabilized sub-grade base.




1. Section 03 1100 - Concrete Forms: Forms for site concrete. 2. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcement: Reinforcement for site concrete. 3. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete for sitework. 4. Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers: Sealant for joints. 5. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Preparation of site for paving and base and preparation

of subsoil at pavement perimeter for planting. 6. Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill: Compacted subbase for paving. 7. Section 31 3200 - Soil Stabilization: Stabilized pavement subgrade. 8. Section 32 1314 - Concrete Walks and Pads: Sidewalks, stoops and equipment

pads. 9. Section 32 1723 - Pavement Markings: Parking lot stripping.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting. 3. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting.


1. ASTM D 1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).

C. Oklahoma Department of Transportation (ODOT):

1. ODOT - State of Oklahoma Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highway Construction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit as part of submittal for Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.



A. Perform work in accordance with ODOT standards. 1. Section 303 - Aggregate Base. 2. Section 414 - Portland Cement Concrete Pavement.

B. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301.

C. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.

D. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.

E. Construct Work within public right-of-way in accordance with requirements of the Authority

Having Jurisdiction. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or

surface is wet or frozen. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS

A. Form Materials: Specified in Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

B. Plywood, metal metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.

C. Joint Filler: ASTM D 1751 preformed; non-extruding bituminous type.

1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2.2 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing: Types specified in Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcement and indicated on Drawings.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Concrete Materials: Specified in Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

B. Concrete Strength: Minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi at 28 days with air-entraining admixture providing minimum 4 percent and maximum 6 percent air by volume.

2.4 BASE MATERIALS

A. Aggregate: Provide Type A aggregate base conforming to ODOT Section 303, thickness to be recommended by geotech engineer.

2.5 ACCESSORIES


A. Joint Sealer: Specified in Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers.

B. Herbicide: Commercial non-selective soil sterilant chemical for weed control, registered by

the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Use type of herbicide approved by the local office of the County Extension Agent or local authority having jurisdiction.



B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive work. 1. Verify compacted subgrade is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed

loads. 2. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.

C. Report in writing to Architect and Owner’s Representative prevailing conditions that will

adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

D. By starting Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting

unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to Owner. 3.2 STABILIZED SUBGRADE

A. Mix and place stabilized subgrade as specified in Section 31 3200 - Soil Stabilization and Geotechnical Report.

3.3 BASE COURSE

A. Place aggregate base course in accordance with ODOT requirements.

B. Apply herbicide to soil areas under aggregate base to inhibit growth of weeds. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended rates and published instructions. Apply to dry, prepared sub-grade surface before placement of aggregate base.

C. Spread aggregate over prepared sub-grade to total thickness indicated.

D. Level and contour surfaces to elevations and gradients indicated on Drawings.

E. Add small quantities of fine aggregate to course aggregate as appropriate to assist

compaction.

F. Add water to assist compaction. If excess water is apparent, remove aggregate and aerate to reduce moisture content.

G. Use mechanical tamping equipment in areas inaccessible to compaction equipment.

3.4 PREPARATION


A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete.

B. Notify Architect minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations.

3.5 FORMING

A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient.

B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete.

C. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement.

3.6 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforce pavement as indicated on Drawings.

B. Place dowels to achieve pavement and curb alignment as detailed. 3.7 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Place concrete as specified in Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete; thickness indicated on Drawings.

B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts and formed joints are not disturbed during

concrete placement.

C. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.

3.8 JOINTS

A. Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints.

B. Place 3/8 inch wide expansion joints at 20 foot intervals and to separate paving from vertical surfaces and other components and in pattern indicated. 1. Form joints with joint filler extending from bottom of pavement to within 1/2 inch of

finished surface. 2. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.

C. Provide scored joints:

1. Between sidewalks and curbs. 2. Between curbs and pavement.

D. Provide keyed joints as indicated.

E. Saw cut contraction joints 3/16 inch wide at an optimum time after finishing. Cut 1/3 into

depth of slab. 3.9 FINISHING


A. Area Paving: Light broom, texture perpendicular to pavement direction.

B. Curbs and Gutters: Light broom, texture parallel to pavement direction. 3.10 JOINT SEALING

A. See Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers for joint sealer requirements. 3.11 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 feet. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect concrete pavement installation, type, dimensions, thickness and finish. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and


B. Section 01 4523 - Testing Laboratory Services: Independent testing agency will perform

concrete tests as specified in Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.


3.13 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

B. Do not permit pedestrian traffic over pavement for 7 days minimum after finishing.

END OF SECTION

32 1314 - 1 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OK Project No. N14023 MSTR 05/08 CONCRETE WALKS AND PADS

SECTION 32 1314 BWA CONCRETE WALKS AND PADS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete sidewalks. 2. Concrete equipment pads. 3. Formed concrete stairs.




1. Section 03 1100 - Concrete Forms: Forms for site concrete. 2. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcement: Reinforcement for site concrete. 3. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete for sitework. 4. Section 05 5213 - Pipe and Tube Railings: Metal handrail sleeves set in concrete. 5. Section 05 5516 – Metal Stair Nosings: Metal nosings at formed concrete stairs. 6. Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers: Sealant for joints.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA): 1. ADA; Americans with Disabilities Act; Federal Register, Volume 56, No. 144 28 CFR

part 36.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Useable

Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council.

C. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 3. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting. 4. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting. 5. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM A 185 - Standard Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.

2. ASTM A 615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

3. ASTM C 94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 4. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 5. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.



1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit as part of submittal for Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301.

B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.

C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS



A. Form Materials: Specified in Section 03 1100 - Concrete Forming.

B. Wood form material, profiled to suit conditions.

C. Joint Filler: ASTM D 1751 preformed; non-extruding bituminous type. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.

2.2 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing: Specified in Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcement.

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed billet bars, unfinished, sizes indicated on Drawings.

C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, Grade 65, steel spot welded at intersections; sizes

indicated on Drawings. 2.3 CONCRETE


B. Concrete Materials: ASTM C 94; Normal Portland Cement.

C. Compressive Strength: Minimum compressive strength of 3,500 psi at 28 days with air-entraining admixture providing minimum 4 percent and maximum 6 percent air by volume.


2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Sealer: Specified in Section 07 9000 – Joint Sealers.

B. Joint Sealer: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C 920, Class 25, traffic grade, gray color.

C. Sand Cushion: Natural river or bank sand; washed; free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, and organic matter.



B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify compacted subgrade is acceptable and ready to support walks, pads and

imposed loads. 2. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.





A. Sub-grade: Prepare by compacting the top 8 inches of sub-grade to 95 percent optimum density with moisture content between 3 percent below and 3 percent above optimum moisture density.

B. Sand Cushion: Place minimum 2 inch thick sand cushion on sub-grade and compact.

3.3 FORMING

A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient. Set forms with

upper edge true to line and grade held in place with stakes spaced maximum 48 inches on center.

B. Set forms to provide smooth surface water flow over finished walk or pad. Finished walks

or pads shall not create ponding either on or behind finished walk or pad.

C. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete.

D. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement.


3.4 REINFORCEMENT

A. Place reinforcement as indicated on Drawings.

B. Place dowels to achieve pavement and curb alignment as indicated on Drawings. 3.5 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R and ACI 302.1R.

B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement.

C. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined

construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.

D. After concrete placement, use strike-off guided by side forms to bring surface to proper level and consolidate. Correct irregularities.

E. Curing:

1. Moisture cure sidewalk and pad surfaces in accordance with ACI 308. 2. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after

placing and finishing. Keep concrtete surfaces continually moist by water ponding, spraying or absorptive mat. a. Ponding: Maintain 100 percent coverage of water over concrete slab areas,

continuously for 4 days. b. Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet for 7 days. c. Absorptive Mat: Saturate burlap-polyethylene with water and place burlap-side

down over floor slab areas, lapping ends and sides minimum 4 inches sealed with waterproof tape; maintain in place for 7 days.

3. Begin final curing after initial curing but before surface is dry by absorptive mat. 3.6 JOINTS

A. Sidewalks: 1. Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints. 2. Divide surfaces into square areas using contraction joints spaced not more than the

width of walk and maximum 10 feet on center, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

3. Place 3/8 inch wide expansion joints at 20 foot intervals and to separate walks from vertical surfaces and other components and in pattern indicated on Drawings. a. Form joints with joint filler extending from bottom of concrete to within 1/2 inch

of finished surface. b. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.

3. Provide scored joints: a. At 3 feet intervals. b. Between sidewalks and curbs.

4. Provide keyed construction joints as indicated on Drawings or when there is an interruption of concrete placement.

5. Saw cut contraction joints 3/16 inch wide at an optimum time after finishing. Cut 1/3 into depth of slab.


B. Pads: 1. Divide pad surfaces into square areas using contraction joints spaced not more than

the width of pad and maximum 10 feet on center, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

2. Place 3/8 inch wide expansion joints at 20 foot intervals and to separate pads from vertical surfaces and other components and in pattern indicated on Drawings. a. Form joints with joint filler extending from bottom of concrete to within 1/2 inch

of finished surface. b. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.

3.7 HANDICAPPED RAMPS

A. Form, place and finish handicapped ramps in compliance with ADA, ANSI/ICC A117.1 and as indicated on Drawings.

3.8 FORMED CONCRETE STAIRS

A. Form concrete stairs as indicted on Drawings.

B. Place metal stair nosing at each tread as specified in Section 05 5516 - Metal Stair Nosings.

3.9 FINISHING

A. Non-Slip Broom: Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete suface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

B. Edging: Finish sidewalk and pad edges, including those at formed joints, with edging tool

having 1/4 inch radius. Edge transverse joints before brooming. 3.10 JOINT SEALING

A. Clean and prime joints, and install sealant in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions and ASTM C 1193.

B. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.

3.11 CONSTRUCTION

A. Site Tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 feet.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect sitework concrete installation, type, dimensions, thickness and finish. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and




Documents. 3.13 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

B. Do not permit pedestrian traffic over site concrete for 7 days minimum after finishing.

END OF SECTION

32 1613 - 1 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OK Project No. N14023 MSTR 0710 CONCRETE CURBS AND GUTTERS

SECTION 32 1613 BWA CONCRETE CURBS AND GUTTERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete integral curbs and gutters. 2. Concrete curb handicapped ramps.


1. The Contract Documents, as defined in Document 00 7213 - General Conditions and modifications thereto, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.


1. Section 03 1000 - Concrete Forms and Accessories: Forms for site concrete. 2. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcement: Reinforcement for site concrete. 3. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete for sitework. 4. Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers: Sealant for curb and gutter joints. 5. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Preparation of site for paving and base and preparation

of subsoil at pavement perimeter for planting. 6. Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill: Compacted subbase for paving. 7. Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Paving: Asphalt paving. 8. Section 32 1313 - Concrete Pavement: Concrete paving. 9. Section 32 1314 - Concrete Walks and Pads: Sidewalks, stoops and equipment

pads. 1.2 REFERENCES

A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): 1. ADA; Americans with Disabilities Act; Federal Register, Volume 56, No. 144 28 CFR

part 36.

B. American National Standards Institute (ACI): 1. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Useable


C. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting. 3. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting.

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):


1.3 SUBMITTALS


A. Submit as part of submittal for Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.


A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301 standards.

B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.

C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS



A. Form Materials: Specified in Section 03 1000 - Concrete Forms and Accessories.

B. Wood or metal, clean, straight, of sufficient strength to resist springing during placement of concrete and of height equal to full depth of curb section.

2.2 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing: Specified in Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcement and indicated on Drawings.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS


B. Concrete Strength: Minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi at 28 days with air-entraining admixture providing minimum 4 percent and maximum 6 percent air by volume.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Filler: ASTM D 1751 preformed; non-extruding bituminous type. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.

B. Joint Sealer: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, class 25, traffic grade, grey color.




B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and

conditions are as required, and ready to receive work.

C. Report in writing to Architect and Owner’s Representative prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

D. By starting Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting

unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to Owner. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Sub-grade: Prepare sub-grade to uniform composition and compaction of material as specified in Section 31 2200 - Grading.

B. Establish lines and grades indicated for curbs and gutters using line and grade stakes.

C. Remove impounded water and debris from forms before placing concrete.

D. Wet wood forms before placing concrete.

3.3 FORMING

A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient as indicated on Drawings.

B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete.

C. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete

placement. 3.4 REINFORCEMENT

A. Place reinforcement as indicated on Drawings.

B. Place dowels to achieve pavement and curb alignment as detailed. 3.5 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Place concrete as specified in Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement.

C. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined

construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. 3.6 JOINTS

A. Align curb, gutter, sidewalk and paving joints.


B. Place 1/2 inch wide expansion joints at indicated intervals and to separate curbs and gutters from vertical surfaces and other components. 1. Space joints at maximum 30 foot intervals. 2. Form joints with joint filler extending from bottom of pavement to within 1/2 inch of

finished surface. 3. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.

C. Form control or contraction joints at two times the curb section thickness in inches (i.e. 2 x

5 inches equals 10 feet). Maximum spacing 15 feet.

D. Provide joints in locations to aid and control cracking. Complete joints before uncontrolled shrinkage cracking occurs.

3.7 HANDICAPPED RAMPS

A. Form, place and finish handicapped ramps in compliance with ANSI/IIC A117.1, ADA and as indicated on Drawings.

3.8 FINISHING

A. Light broom; curb and flow lines of gutters finished by use of steel trowel to contour of required grades and then cross brushed.

3.9 CONSTRUCTION

A. Site Tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

3.10 FORM REMOVAL

A. Keep forms in place minimum 12 hours after placing concrete.

B. Do not use bars of heaving tools against concrete when removing forms.

C. Remove and repair defective concrete as specified in Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect curb and gutter installation, type, dimensions, thickness and finish. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and


B. Section 01 4525 - Testing Laboratory Services: Independent testing agency will perform

concrete tests as specified in Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.



3.12 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

B. Do not permit pedestrian traffic over concrete for seven (7) days minimum after finishing.

END OF SECTION

32 1723 - 1 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OK Project No. N14023 MSTR 0710 PAVEMENT MARKINGS

SECTION 32 1723 BWA PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Driveway and parking lot striping. 2. Painted pavement markings at handicapped parking stalls. 3. Pavement Markings Schedule, at end of Section.




1. Section 32 1216 – Asphalt Paving: Paving substrate for marking application. 2. Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving: Paving substrate for marking application.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): 1. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act; Federal Register, Volume 56, No. 144 28 CFR

part 36.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Useable


C. U.S. General Services Administration (GSA): 1. GSA FS TT-P-115E - Traffic Paint.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 1. Product Data: Technical data sheets indicating manufacturer's catalog number, paint

type description, and VOC content.

B. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Requirements for closeout submittals. 1. Installation Certification: Submit written certification of installation on form located at

end of Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Application Qualification: Provide qualified technician to superise equipment and application of marking.

B. Regulatory Requirements:


1. Provide paint and coating materials that conform to Federal, State, and Local restrictions for Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) content.

C. Manufacturer Installation Instructions: Contractor shall maintian current copy of pavement

marking paint manufactuer published installation instructions in Project Field Office and refer to instructions at all times during installation.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Deliver, store, protect and handle products.

B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.

C. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.

D. Deliver Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each material to Project Field

Superintendent for Contractor Records.

E. Accept Products on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage. Return damaged Products and replace with undamaged Products.

F. Project Field Superintendent shall inspect Products immediately upon delivery to Project


G. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum

of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the

humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Pavement Markingss is based on the product named. 1. Aexcel Corporation: www.aexcelcorp.com.

B. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Subject to

compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Ennis Traffic Safety Solutions: www.ennistraffic.com


2. Trantex, Incorporated: www.trantexinc.com. 2.2 TRAFFIC PAINT

A. Chlorinated Rubber VOC Compliant Zone Marking Paint conforming to GSA FS TT-P-115E Type III, white, yellow, blue or red, lead free.

B. Application Dry Film Thickness (DFT): 15 mils.

C. Drying Time: 15 minutes at 77 degrees F.

D. Application Equipment: Airless spray.



B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product

manufacturer.




A. Remove dust, dirt and other granular surface deposits by sweeping, blowing with compressed air, rinsing with water, or a combination of these methods.

B. Remove rubber deposits, residual curing compounds and other coatings adhering to

pavement by water blasting.

C. Allow new paving to cure for minimum 30 days before application of pavement markings.

D. Testing for Moisture: Test pavement surface for moisture before beginning marking application after each peroid of rainfall, fog, high humidity, or cleaning, or when ambient temperature has fallen below dew point. 1. Plastic Wrap Test Method:

a. Cover pavement with 12 inch x 12 inch section of clear plastic wrap and seal edges with tape.

b. After 15 minutes, examine plastic wrap for any visible moisture accumulation inside plastic.

c. Do not begin pavement marking until test can be performed with no visible moisture accumulation inside plastic wrap.


E. Layout pavement markings using guide lines, templates and forms.

F. Clean, test and check application equipment for proper film thickness and adjust pressure

or speed to obtain specified mil thickness and uniform line thickneess.

G. Protect adjacent curbs, walks, fences and other items from pavment marking application. 3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using application procedures approved for application and substrate.

B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry and if rain is expected within 24 hours.

C. Apply materials at not less than manufacturer’s recommended spreading rate. Provide

minimum dry film thickness (DFT) of entire coating system as specified.

D. Apply stripes straight and even with sharp edges.

E. Apply stripes and other markings in widths and colors indicated in Schedule. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove overspray, spills, or drips from surfaces.

B. Barricade marked areas unitl marking paint is dry and ready for traffic. 3.5 WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Dispose of all paint and related materials in conformance with all State and local environmental and waste disposal regulations at approved waste disposal location.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect pavement marking application for material, color, sheen, specified mil

thickness, coverage, dimensions and layout. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents. 3.7 SCHEDULE - PAVEMENT MARKINGS

A. Paint the following items at locations and spacings indicated on Drawings.

B. Parking Stall Stripping: 4 inch wide, White.

C. Directional Arrows and Graphics: White, size and configuration as indicated on Drawings.


D. Handicapped Parking Stall Striping: 4 inch wide with diagonals where indicated, International Handicapped Blue in accordance with ADA and ANSI/ICC A117.1.

E. Handicapped Parking Stall Symbol: International Symbol of Accessibility, white graphic on

36 inch x 36 inch on International Handicapped Blue background in accordance with ADA and ANSI/ICC A117.1.

F. Curbs Marked as Fire Lane: Paint curbs red with white text markings NO PARKING FIRE

LANE (Or as directed by Authorities Having Jurisdiction).

END OF SECTION


PAVEMENT MARKINGS INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION PROJECT: ____________________________________________________ LOCATION: ___________________________________________________ ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NUMBER: ________________ OWNER: ______________________________________________________ CONTRACTOR: ________________________________________________ PAVEMENT MARKINGS APPLICATOR:

Name: ___________________________________________________

Address: _________________________________________________

Telephone Number: ________________________________________ UPON COMPLETION OF APPLICATION PAINT APPLICATOR CERTIFIES THAT: 1. Applicator obtained a current copy of the manufacturer's published surface preparation and traffic

paint application instructions for the specific surface and product being applied. 2. Applicator reviewed and discussed manufacturer's published surface preparation and traffic paint

application instructions and requirements with Project Field Superintendent before start of application.

3. Applicator checked moisture content of substrates and found them in compliance with specified requirements.

4. Installer applied specified traffic paint in accordance with the Contract Documents. 5. Applicator applied traffic paint to dry film thickness (DFT) in compliance with specified

requirements. EXECUTED AND DELIVERED this _________________ day of ______________, 20___ . ________________________________________ (company name) BY: ____________________________________ (authorized signature) Subscribed and sworn to before me this ____________day of _____________, 20___. ________________________________________________ Notary Public _______________________________________________ Affix Seal My Commission expires:

END OF CERTIFICATION

32 3113 - 1 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OKProject No. N14023 MSTR 1114 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES

SECTION 32 3113 BWA N14023 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Materials 2. Components 3. Accessories 4. Finishes

B. Related Documents: 1. The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 00 7213 - General Conditions and

modifications thereto, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.


1. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete anchorage for posts. 2. Section 04 2206 - Masonry Screen Walls: Gate attachment substrate.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron

and Steel Products. 2. ASTM A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware. 3. ASTM C 94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 4. ASTM F 567 - Standard Specification for the Installation of Chain-Link Fence. 5. ASTM F 668 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Coated Steel

Chain Link Fence Fabric. 6. ASTM F 900 - Specification for Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates. 7. ASTM F 1043 – Standard Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings on Steel

Industrial Chain Link Fence Framework. 8. ASTM F 1083 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures. 9. ASTM F626-14 Standard Specification for Fence Fittings

B. Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI):

1. CLFMI (PM) - Product Manual. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 1. Product Data: Provide data on fabric, posts, accessories, fittings and hardware. 2. Shop Drawings: Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation

dimensions, hardware, anchorage, and schedule of components.



A. Perform Work in accordance with CLFMI - Product Manual. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Transport, handle, store and protect products.

B. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.



D. Project Field Superintendent shall inspect Products immediately upon delivery to Project Site, determine Product conformance with specified requirements and reject Products not complying with specifications. Project Field Superintendent shall direct that non-complying Products be removed from Project Site immediately.

E. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature

and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.

F. Handle and store as required by CLFMI (PM). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Materials and Components: Conform to CLFMI Product Manual, ASTM F 567 and ASTM F 900.

B. Fabric Size:

1. CLFMI 11 gage - Light Industrial & Residential service C. Intermediate Posts:

1. Type II round: Cold-formed steel pipe complying with ASTM F 1043.

D. Terminal, Corner, Rail, Brace, and Gate Posts: Type I round.

E. Concrete: Type specified in Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. 2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Gate Posts: 1. Less than 6 feet in height: 2.38 inch diameter.

a. Width up to 10 feet wide: 2.38 inch diameter 1. More than 6 feet in height: 2.88 inch diameter.

B. Top and Brace Rail: 1.66 inch diameter, plain end, sleeve coupled.

C. Gate Frame: 1.66 diameter for welded fabrication.


D. Fabric: 2 inch diamond mesh interwoven wire, top salvage knuckle end closed, bottom selvage knuckle end closed.

E. Tension Wire: 6 gage thick steel, single strand.

F. Tie Wire: Aluminum alloy steel wire.

G. Hardware at Masonry Screen Wall Gate:

1. Hinges: Two, 180 degree type J-bolt hinge for installation in masonry wall with female strap hinge at gate. a. Furnish J-bolt hinges to Masonry Screen Wall Installer for installation in

masonry screen wall. 2. Latch: Fork type with padlock eye, for surface mounting to masonry wall.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Caps: Cast steel galvanized; sized to post diameter, set screw retainer.

B. Fittings: Sleeves, bands, clips, rail ends, tension bars, fasteners and fittings; steel. 2.4 FINISHES

A. Components and Fabric: Galvanized to ASTM A123; 1.8 oz/sq ft coating.

B. Hardware: Galvanized to ASTM A153, 1.8 oz/sq ft coating.

C. Accessories: Same finish as framing.

D. PVC Coating: ASTM F 668, PVC coating for components, fabric, hardware and accessories. 1. Color: Selected by Architect.







correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install framework, fabric, accessories and gates in accordance with ASTM F 567, ASTM F 900 and CLFMI (PM). Space posts maximum 8 feet on center.


B. Place fabric on outside of posts and rails.

C. Set intermediate, terminal and gate, posts plumb, in concrete footings with top of footing 6

inches below finish grade.

D. Line Post Footing Depth Below Finish Grade: 2 feet.

E. Corner, Gate and Terminal Post Footing Depth Below Finish Grade: 3 feet.

F. Brace each gate and corner post to adjacent line post with horizontal center brace rail. Install brace rail one bay from end and gate posts.

G. Provide top rail through line post tops and splice with 6 inch long rail sleeves.

H. Do not stretch fabric until concrete foundation has cured 28 days.

I. Stretch fabric between terminal posts.

J. Position bottom of fabric 2 inches above finished grade.

K. Fasten fabric to top rail, line posts, braces, and bottom tension wire with tie wire at

maximum 15 inches on centers.

L. Attach fabric to end, corner, and gate posts with tension bars and tension bar clips.

M. Install bottom tension wire stretched taut between terminal posts.

N. Do not attach the hinged side of gate from building wall; provide gate posts.

O. Install gate with fabric to match fence. Install three hinges per leaf, fork type latch with padlock eyes and provision for padlock installation and catches.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION

A. Interface with Other Work: 1. Meet and coordinate with Masonry Screen Wall Installer for correct locations of gate

hinges installed in masonry wall. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect fence installation, post spacing, fence location and clearance from

mechanical units, gate size and latch/lock device. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents. 3.5 SCHEDULE


A. Fencing Enclosure at Exterior Mechanical Units: 4 feet high with 4 foot wide gate. Verify all required clearances for maintenance access to units with Mechanical Contractor.

END OF SECTION

32 9223 - 1 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OKProject No. N14023 MSTR 0311 SODDING

SECTION 32 9223 BWA N14023 SODDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Preparation of subsoil. 2. Placing topsoil. 3. Fertilizing. 4. Sod installation.




1. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Preparation of sub-grade and topsoil material. 1.2 REFERENCES

A. Turfgrass Producers International (TPI): 1. TPI (SPEC) - Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding.


A. Sod Producer: Company specializing in sod production and harvesting with minimum five years documented experience.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition. 2. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval

of fertilizer and herbicide mixture, if required. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Transport, handle, store and protect products.

B. Deliver sod on pallets. Protect exposed roots from dehydration.

C. Do not deliver more sod than can be laid within 24 hours.



A. Sod: TPI, Certified Turfgrass Sod quality; cultivated grass sod; type indicated on Drawings or matching existing sod; with strong fibrous root system, free of stones, burned or bare spots; containing no more than five (5) weeds per 1000 square feet. 1. Minimum age of 18 months, with root development that will support its own weight

without tearing, when suspended vertically by holding the upper two corners.

B. Topsoil: Specified in Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill.

C. Fertilizer: Type recommended for grass, with fifty percent of the elements derived from organic sources; of proportion necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil.

D. Water: Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter which could inhibit vigorous growth of

grass. 2.2 HARVESTING SOD

A. Machine cut sod and load on pallets in accordance with TPI Guidelines.

B. Cut sod in area not exceeding one (1) square yard, with minimum 1/2 inch and maximum one (1) inch topsoil base.



B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that prepared soil base is ready to receive the work of this section.





A. Prepare sub-grade in accordance with Section 31 2200 – Grading.

B. Place topsoil in accordance with Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill. 3.3 FERTILIZING

A. Apply fertilizer in accordance with sod suppliers instructions.

B. Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to installation of sod.


C. Apply fertilizer no more than 48 hours before laying sod.

D. Mix thoroughly into upper two (2) inches of topsoil.

E. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer.

3.4 LAYING SOD

A. Moisten prepared surface immediately prior to laying sod.

B. Lay sod immediately after delivery to site to prevent deterioration.

C. Lay sod tight with no open joints visible, and no overlapping; stagger end joints 12 inches minimum. Do not stretch or overlap sod pieces.

D. Lay smooth. Align with adjoining grass areas.

E. Place top elevation of sod 1/2 inch below adjoining sidewalks and paving.

F. On slopes, lay sod perpendicular to slope and secure every row and secure with wooden

pegs at maximum two (2) feet on center. Drive pegs flush with soil portion of sod.

G. Water sodded areas immediately after installation. Saturate sod to 4 inches of soil.

H. After installation water sodded areas. Saturate sod for 4 inches of soil.

I. After sod and soil have dried, roll sodded areas to ensure good bond between sod and soil and to remove minor depressions and irregularities.

3.5 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain sod until Substantial Completion.

B. Water to prevent sod and soil from drying out.

C. Control growth of weeds.

D. Immediately replace sod to areas which show deterioration or bare spots. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect sod installation, coverage and conditions. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.

END OF SECTION

33 1115 - 1 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OK Project No. N14023 MSTR 0710 SITE WATER DISTRIBUTION

SECTION 33 1115 BWA SITE WATER DISTRIBUTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Domestic water system pipe and fittings. 2. Fire water line. 3. Connection of domestic water system to municipal water system.




6. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete for thrust blocks. 1. Section 31 2333 - Trenching for Site Utilities: Water line trenching. 2. Section 33 1305- Disinfection of Water Distribution: Disinfection of potable water

distribution system. 3. Section 33 3115 - Sanitary Sewerage: Site sewer lines. 5. Section 33 4915 - Storm Drainage: Site storm drain lines. 4. Section 33 5100 - Natural Gas Distribution: Site natural gas lines.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 2. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.


1. ASTM D 1785 - Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.

2. ASTM D 2466 - Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings.

3. ASTM D 2855 - Standard Specification for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings.

4. ASTM D 3139 - Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals.

C. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

1. AWWA C 504 - Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves. 2. AWWA C 508 - Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 inch through 24 inch

NPS. 3. AWWA C 509 - Resilient Seated Gate Valves 3 inch through 12 inch NPS, for Water

and Sewage Systems. 4. AWWA C 900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4 In.

Through 12 In. (100mm Through 300mm).


D. Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (UBPPA):

1. UBPPA UNI-B-3 - Recommended Practice for the Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe (Nominal Diameters 4 - 36 Inch).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 1. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, hydrants and

accessories. 2. Assurance/Control Submittals:

a. Test Reports: Submit the following reports directly to Architect with copy to Civil Engineer. Prepare reports in conformance with Section 01 4500 - Quality Control. 1) Pressure test. 2) Leakage test.

b. Qualification Documentation: Submit documentation of experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements.


1. Project Record Documents: Accurately record the following: a. Actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections, and top of pipe

elevations. b. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions and location

of uncharted utilities. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing site water distribution Work with minimum five (5) years documented experience.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Perform Work in accordance with utility company requirements,

applicable hearth codes and authority having jurisdiction requirements.

C. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING







Site, determine Product conformance with specified requirements and reject Products not


complying with specifications. Project Field Superintendent shall direct that non-complying Products be removed from Project Site immediately.

F. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature


G. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements and invert elevations are as indicated on Drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE

A. PVC Fire/Domestic Water Pipe - 4 inches or Greater: AWWA C 900, blue, certified and marked with NSF Certification. 1. Fittings: Cast iron or ductile iron. 2. Joints: ASTM D 3139, compression gasket ring. 3. Trace Tape: Specified in Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling.

B. PVC Domestic Water Pipe - 3 inches or Smaller: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40, certified and

marked with NSF Certification. 1. Fittings: ASTM D 2466, PVC. 2. Joints: ASTM D 2855, solvent weld. 3. Trace Tape: Specified in Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling.

2.2 GATE VALVES - UP TO 3 INCHES

A. Brass body, Teflon coated brass ball, rubber seats and stem seals, Tee stem pre-drilled for control rod, AWWA compression inlet end, compression outlet with electrical ground connector, with control rod, extension box and valve key.

2.3 GATE VALVES - 3 INCHES AND OVER

A. AWWA 509, iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem with square nut, single wedge, resilient seat, flanged ends, control rod and extension box.

2.4 BALL VALVES - UP TO 2 INCHES

A. Brass body, Teflon coated brass ball, rubber seats and stem seals, Tee stem pre-drilled for control rod, AWWA compression inlet end, compression outlet with electrical ground connector, with control rod and extension box.

2.5 SWING CHECK VALVES - FROM 2 INCHES TO 24 INCHES

A. AWWA C508, iron body, bronze trim, 45 degree swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends.


2.6 BUTTERFLY VALVES - FROM 2 INCHES TO 24 INCHES

A. AWWA C504, iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat, water or lug ends, infinite position lever handle.

2.7 THRUST BLOCKS

A. Concrete specified in Section 03 3000 – Cast-In-Place Concrete. Place thrust blocking consisting of 2,500 psi concrete to provide sufficient bearing area to transmit unbalanced thrust from bends, tees, caps, or plugs to undisturbed soil without loading undisturbed soil in excess of 2,500 pounds per square foot when water main pressure is 100 psi.

B. Thrust block requirements indicated on Drawings.

2.8 BEDDING

A. Specified in Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify trench cut, excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on

Drawings. 2. Verify that building service connection and municipal utility water main size, location

and invert elevation are as indicated on Drawings.




A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with fine aggregate.

B. Remove large stones or other hard matter, which could damage pipe or impede consistent backfilling or compaction.

C. Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends and remove burrs.

D. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

E. Prepare pipe for connections to equipment with flanges or unions.


3.3 BEDDING

A. Excavate pipe trench and place bedding material in accordance with Section 02321. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated. Provide trench wall shoring as required.

B. Form and place concrete for pipe thrust restraints at any change of pipe direction and at

fittings as indicated on Drawings. Place concrete to permit full access to pipe and pipe accessories. Provide thrust blocks on subsoil as incicated on Drawings.

C. Place bedding material at trench bottom, level fill materials in one continuous layer not

exceeding 6 inches compacted depth, each layer.

D. Place compacted bedding material to elevation of paving subgrade as indicated on Drawings.

E. Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required compaction

density.

F. Remove excess backfill and excavated material from site. 3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Maintain separation of water main from sanitary and storm sewer piping in accordance with state or local code and as indicated on Drawings.

B. Install pipe and fittings in accordance with UBPPA UNI-B-3.

C. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints or as

specified by pipe manufacturer.

D. Install access fittings in accordance with local codes to permit disinfection of water system performed under this Section.

E. Form and place concrete for thrust blocks or other specified methods of retainage at each

change of direction or end of pipe main.

F. Establish elevations of buried piping as indicated on Drawings.

G. Backfill trench in accordance with Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling.

H. Install trace tape as specified in Section 31 2333 -Trenching and Backfilling. 3.5 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM

A. Flush and disinfect system in accordance with Section 33 1305 - Disinfection of Water Distribution.

3.6 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A. Coordinate the Work with termination of water distribution system connection outside building including connection to municipal Water System Utility.


B. Connect to existing municipal water system in compliance with municipal Water System

Utility requirements for new service connections.

C. Provide backflow preventer as required by municipal Water System Utility.

D. Connections with Existing Pipelines: Where connections are made between new work and existing piping, make connection using suitable fittings for conditions encountered. Make each connection with existing pipe at time and under conditions which least interfere with operation of existing pipeline and in compliance with the local utility company.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect site water distribution system installation, pipe run location, pipe type, valve

type, size and invert elevation. 2. Tests: Perform the following tests in accordance with UBPPA UNI-B-3.

a. Pressure Test. b. Leakage Test.



B. Inspections by Authority Having Jurisdiction: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation site water distribution systems until they

are inspected and approved by Authority Having Jurisdiction. 2. Notify Plumbing Official Having Jurisdiction minimum number of days in advance of

inspection as required by Authority Having Jurisdiction to schedule Inspection. Verify with Authority Having Jurisdiction. a. Underground Inspection: Schedule inspection of site water distribution piping

system after trenches are excavated and bedded, piping installed, and before any backfill is placed.

3. Reinspections: Whenever inspections find that piping system does not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and schedule a reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare and submit inspection reports indicating results of tests and inspections made as specified in Section 01 4500 - Quality Control.


Documents.

END OF SECTION

33 1305 - 1 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OK Project No. N14023 MSTR 0710 DISINFECTION OF WATER DISTRIBUTION

SECTION 33 1305 BWA DISINFECTION OF WATER DISTRIBUTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Disinfection of potable water distribution system. 2. Testing and reporting results.




1. Section 33 1115 - Site Water Distribution: Water lines from city connection to within 5 feet of building.

2. Division 22 - Plumbing: Disinfection of building domestic water piping system. 1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. AWWA B300 - Standard for Hypochlorites. 2. AWWA B301 - Standard for Liquid Chlorine. 3. AWWA B302 - Standard for Ammonium Sulfate. 4. AWWA B303 - Standard for Sodium Chlorite. 5. AWWA C651 - Standards for Disinfecting Water Mains.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 1. Assurance/Control Submittals:

a. Test Reports: Submit the following reports directly to Architect. Prepare reports in conformance with Section 01 4500 - Quality Control. 1) Indicate results comparative to specified requirements.

b. Certificate: Certify that cleanliness of water distribution system meets or exceeds specified requirements.

c. Qualification Documentation: Submit documentation of experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements.


1. Project Record Documents: a. Disinfection Report:

1) Type and form of disinfectant used. 2) Date and time of disinfectant injection start and time of completion. 3) Test locations. 4) Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals (quantity in treated water) in

ppm for each outlet tested.


5) Date and time of flushing start and completion. 6) Disinfectant residual after flushing in ppm for each outlet tested.

b. Bacteriological Report: 1. Date issued, project name, and testing laboratory name, address, and

telephone number. 2. Time and date of water sample collection. 3. Name of person collecting samples. 4. Test locations. 5. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals in ppm for each outlet tested. 6. Coliform bacteria test results for each outlet tested. 7. Certification that water conforms, or fails to conform, to bacterial

standards of the authority having jurisdiction in the State where Project is located.


A. Perform Work in accordance with AWWA C651.

B. Water Treatment Firm: Company specializing in disinfecting potable water systems specified in this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience.

C. Testing Firm: Company specializing in testing examining potable water systems, certified

approved by the State where Project is located.

D. Submit bacteriologist's signature and authority associated with testing.

E. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to applicable code or regulation for performing the work of this Section. 2. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval

of water system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DISINFECTION CHEMICALS

A. Chemicals: AWWA B300, Hypochlorite, AWWA B301, Liquid Chlorine, AWWA B302, Ammonium Sulfate, and AWWA B303, Sodium Chlorite.



B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that piping system has been cleaned, inspected and pressure tested. 2. Perform scheduling and disinfecting activity with start-up, testing, adjusting and

balancing, demonstration procedures, including coordination with related systems.




correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.2 DISINFECTION

A. Pressure test system in accordance with Section 33 1115 – Site Water Distribution. Repair leaks and re-test.

B. Provide and attach required equipment to perform the work of this Section.

C. Introduce treatment into piping system.

D. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.

E. Flush, circulate, and clean until required cleanliness is achieved; use municipal domestic

water.

F. Replace permanent system devices removed for disinfection. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect disinfection water treatment procedures for potable water system. 2. Test samples in accordance with AWWA C651. 3. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.

END OF SECTION

33 3115 - 1 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OK Project No. N14023 MSTR 0710 SANITARY SEWERAGE

SECTION 33 3115 BWA SANITARY SEWERAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Sanitary sewer drainage piping, fittings, accessories and bedding. 2. Clean-out and access structures. 3. Connection to municipal sanitary sewer system.




1. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete for base pads and encasement. 2. Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling: Sewer line trenching. 3. Section 33 1115 - Site Water Distribution: Site water lines. 4. Section 33 4915 - Storm Drainage: Site storm drain lines. 5. Section 33 5100 - Natural Gas Distribution: Site natural gas lines.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM D 2321 - Recommended Practice for Underground Installation of Flexible

Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe. 2 ASTM D 3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 1. Product Data: Provide data indicating pipe and pipe accessories. 2. Assurance/Control Submittals:

a. Test Reports: Submit the following reports directly to Architect with copy to Civil Engineer. Prepare reports in conformance with Section 01 4500 - Quality Control. 1) Air Exfiltration Test. 2) Water Infiltration Test. 3) Water Exfiltration Test.

b. Qualification Documentation: Submit documentation of experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements.


1. Project Record Documents: Accurately record the following: a. Actual locations of pipe runs, connections, manholes, cleanouts, and invert

elevations.


b. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions and location of uncharted utilities.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing sanitary sewerage work with minimum five (5) years documented experience.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Perform work in accordance with utility company requirements,

applicable health codes and authority having jurisdiction requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING









and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements and elevations are as indicated on Drawings.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Work with termination of sanitary sewer connection outside building, connection to municipal sewer utility service and trenching.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE MATERIALS

A. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 3034, Type PSM, Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) material; bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint end.

B. Pipe Joints: Joints integrally molded bell ends and factory supplied elastomeric gaskets

and lubricant.


C. Pipe Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in

required tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required.

D. Trace Tape: Specified in Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling. 2.2 CLEANOUTS

A. Lid and Frame: Cast iron construction with removable lid as indicated on Drawings.

B. Shaft Construction: Material and internal diameter as indicated on Drawings.

C. Base Pad: Cast-in-place concrete specified in Section 03 3000 – Cast-In-Place Concrete. 2.3 BEDDING

A. Specified in Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify trench cut, excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on

Drawings. 2. Verify that building service connection and municipal utility sewer main size, location

and invert elevation are as indicated on Drawings.




A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with fine aggregate. B. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage pipe or impede consistent

backfilling or compaction. 3.3 BEDDING

A. Excavate pipe trench and place bedding material in accordance with Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated.


B. Place bedding material at trench bottom, level materials in continuous layer not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth, each layer. Place compacted bedding material to elevation of paving subgrade as indicated on Drawings.

C. Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required compaction

density.

D. Remove excess backfill and excavated material from site. 3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE

A. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with ASTM D 2321, manufacturer's published instructions and state or local requirements. Seal joints watertight.

B. Install pipe on minimum 4 inch bedding as specified in Section 31 2333 - Trenching and

Backfilling.

C. Lay pipe to slope gradients indicated on Drawings.

D. Refer to Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling for trenching requirements. Do not displace or damage pipe when compacting.

E. Connect to building sanitary sewer outlet and municipal sewer system as indicated on

Drawings.

F. Install trace tape as specified in Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling. 3.5 INSTALLATION - CLEANOUTS

A. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to elevation indicated on Drawings.

B. Form and place cast-in-place concrete encasement, with provision for sanitary sewer pipe to be placed at required elevations.

C. Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top section at elevation indicated.


A. Coordinate the Work with termination of sanitary sewer connection outside building including connection to municipal sanitary sewer system.

B. Connect to existing municipal sanitary sewer system in compliance with utility requirements

for new service connections. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect site sewerage system installation, pipe run location, pipe type, size, invert

elevation, cleanout type and cleanout locations. 2. Leakage Tests: Perform the following tests in accordance with pipe manufacturer’s

published instructions.


a. Air Exfiltratiion Test. b. Water Infiltration Test. c. Water Exfiltration Test.



B. Inspections by Authority Having Jurisdiction: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation site sanitary sewerage systems until they

are inspected and approved by Authority Having Jurisdiction. 2. Notify Plumbing Official Having Jurisdiction minimum number of days in advance of

inspection as required by Authority Having Jurisdiction to schedule Inspection. Verify with Authority Having Jurisdiction. a. Underground Inspection: Schedule inspection of site sanitary sewerage piping





Documents.

END OF SECTION

33 4915 - 1 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OK Project No. N14023 MSTR 0710 STORM DRAINAGE

SECTION 33 4915 BWA STORM DRAINAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Site storm sewer drainage piping, fittings, accessories and bedding. 2. Catch basins, paved area drainage and site surface drainage.




1. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete for catch basins, inlets and junction boxes.

2. Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling: Sewer line trenching. 3. Section 33 1115 - Site Water Distribution: Site water lines. 4. Section 33 3115 - Sanitary Sewerage: Site sanitary sewer system. 5. Section 33 5100 - Natural Gas Distribution: Site natural gas lines.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): 1. AASHTO M 294 - Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe, 300mm

to 1500mm Diameter. 2. AASHTO M 252 - Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Pipe.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 1. Product Data: Provide data indicating pipe and pipe accessories. 2. Assurance/Control Submittals:

a. Qualification Documentation: Submit documentation of experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements.


1. Project Record Documents: Accurately record the following: a. Actual locations of pipe runs, connections, manholes, cleanouts, and invert

elevations. b. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions and location

of uncharted utilities. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications:


1. Installer: Company specializing in performing storm drainage work with minimum five (5) years documented experience.










and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements and elevations are as indicated on Drawings.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate work with, trenching and termination of storm drainage connection to municipal Utility Service.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE MATERIALS

A. Smooth Interior Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Tubing: AASHTO M 252 or M 294.

B. Trace Tape: Specified in Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling. 2.2 CATCH BASINS, INLETS AND AREA DRAINS

A. Basin and Drain Lid and Frame: Cast iron construction of type indicated on Drawings.

B. Curb and Gutter Inlets: Cast iron construction of type indicated on Drawings

C. Shaft, Top and Base Section Construction: Pre-cast concrete or reinforced cast-in-place concrete of type and configuration indicated on Drawings.


2.3 BEDDING

A. Specified in Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling and indicated on Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for Work are as indicated on

Drawings. 2. Verify trench cut, excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on

Drawings.





B. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage pipe or impede consistent backfilling or compaction.

3.3 BEDDING

A. Excavate pipe trench and place bedding material in accordance with Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated.

B. Place bedding material at trench bottom, level materials in continuous layer not exceeding

6 inches compacted depth, each layer. Place compacted bedding material to elevation of paving subgrade as indicated on Drawings.


density. 3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE

A. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and as indicated on Drawings. Seal joints watertight.

B. Install pipe on minimum bedding as specified in Section 31 2333 - Trenching and

Backfilling and indicated on Drawings.


C. Lay pipe to slope gradients indicated on Drawings.

D. Refer to Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling for trenching requirements. Do not

displace or damage pipe when compacting.

E. Connect to storm drainage system, manholes and inlets as indicated on Drawings.

F. Install trace tape as specified in Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling. 3.5 INSTALLATION - CATCH BASINS, INLETS AND AREA DRAINS

A. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to elevation indicated on Drawings.

B. Set precast units in place with provision for storm drainage pipe as indicated on Drawings.

C. Form and place cast-in-place concrete encasement, with provision for storm drainage pipe as indicated on Drawings.

D. Form and place cast-in-place top of structure as indicated on Drawings.

E. Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top section at elevation indicated.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect site storm drainage system installation, pipe run location, pipe type, size,

invert elevations, inlet types and cleanout locations. 2. Obtain inspection and approval of system installation from authorities having

jurisdiction. 3. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor Test and

Inspection Reports and submit to Architect.

B. Correct deficiencies in products and installation found not to be in compliance with Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION

33 5100 - 1 Mountain View-Gotebo Schools, Mountain View, OK Project No. N14023 MSTR 0710 NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION

SECTION 33 5100 BWA NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe and fittings for site utility natural gas distribution.




1. Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling: Gas line trenching. 2. Section 33 1115 - Site Water Distribution: Site water lines. 3. Section 33 3115 - Sanitary Sewerage: Site sewer lines. 4. Section 33 4915 - Storm Drainage: Site storm drain lines. 5. Division 22 - Plumbing: Building natural gas piping.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. ASME Sec. 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. 2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Code.


1. ASTM A 53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless. 2. ASTM A 234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate

and Elevated Temperatures.

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping. 2. ANSI B31.8 - Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 1. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories. 2. Assurance/Control Submittals:

a. Test Reports: Submit the following reports directly to Architect form, with copy to Civil Engineer. Prepare reports in conformance with Section 01 4500 - Quality Control. 1) NFPA 54 tests. 2) Capacities and pressure ratings for meters, regulators and valves.


3) Pressure settings for pressure regulators. b. Qualification Documentation: Submit documentation of experience indicating

compliance with specified qualification requirements.

B. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Procedures for closeout submittals. 1. Project Record Documents: Accurately record the following:

a. Actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections, and top of pipe elevations.

b. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions and location of uncharted utilities.


A. Installer Qualification: Company specializing in performing natural gas distribution Work with minimum 5 years documented experience.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Perform work in accordance with Utility Company requirements

and authority having jurisdiction. 1. Conform to NFPA 54, ANSI B31.2 and ANSI B31.8.

C. Gas Cock: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.

D. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code

and applicable State regulations.

E. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME Sec 9. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING










G. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place. PART 2 PRODUCTS


2.1 PIPE

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, black. 1. Fittings: ASTM A 234, forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: ANSI B31.2, welded. 3. Jackets: Double layer, half lapped, 10 mil polyethylene tape.

2.2 GAS COCKS

A. Two (2) Inches and Smaller: 150 psig WOG, bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non-

lubricated, Teflon packing, threaded ends with cast iron curb box, cover, and key. B. Two (2) Inches and Larger: 125 psig WOG, Steel or Cast iron body and tapered plug, non-

lubricated, Teflon packing, threaded ends, with cast iron curb box, cover, and key. 2.3 PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES

A. Valves: Single stage, malleable iron body, corrosion-resistant, pressure regulator with atmospheric vent, elevation compensator; with threaded ends for 2 inch and smaller, flanged ends larger than 2 inch.

B. Capacity: For inlet and outlet gas pressures, specific gravity, and flow rate indicated on

Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify trench cut, excavations and dimensions are as indicated on Drawings. 2. Verify that building service connection and utility gas main size, location, and depth

are as indicated.





B. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage pipe or impede consistent backfilling or compaction.


3.3 BEDDING

A. Excavate pipe trench and place bedding material in accordance with Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling for work of this Section. Provide trench wall shoring as required.

B. Place bedding material at trench bottom, level fill materials in one continuous layer not

exceeding 6 inches compacted depth, each layer. Place compacted bedding material to elevation of sub-grade as indicated on Drawings.


density.

D. Remove excess backfill and excavated material from site. 3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPING

A. Maintain separation of gas line from sewer, water or storm water piping in accordance with state or local code.

B. Route piping in straight line.

C. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints.

D. Install cocks and other fittings as required.

E. Establish elevations of buried piping to ensure not less than 24 inches of cover in non-

traveled areas and 48 inches in driveways and parking areas and in accordance with Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling.

F. Lay pipe on bedding.

G. Wrap couplings and fittings of steel pipe with polyethylene tape and heat shrink over pipe.

H. Backfill trench in accordance with Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling.

I. Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished ground surface.

Prevent shock or stress from being transmitted through valve box to valve.

J. Wrap valve and valve box with polyethylene tape and heat shrink or paint valves and valve boxes with red anti-rust primer and one coat of epoxy paint.


A. Provide sleeve in foundation wall for gas service main. Seal enlarged sleeve watertight.

B. Anchor service main to interior surface of foundation wall.

C. Install service regulator adjacent to building wall in location indicated on Drawings.

D. Install service regulator and riser pipe to prevent undue stress upon service pipe. For plastic service pipe, use steel pipe riser from below ground to regulator.


E. Provide regulator vent with rain and insect proof opening, terminating not less than five feet away from building openings.

F. Connections with Existing Pipelines: Where connections are made between new Work and

existing piping, make connection using suitable fittings for conditions encountered. Make each connection with existing pipe at time and under conditions which least interfere with operation of existing pipeline and in compliance with the local Utility Company.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect gas piping in conformance with NFPA 54, Part 4 and local Utility Company

requirements. 2. Perform the following tests:

a. Test and purge gas piping in conformance with NFPA 54, Part 4 and local Utility Company requirements.

b. Verify capacities and pressure ratings of gas meters, regulators, and valves. c. Verify required pressure settings for pressure regulators.



B. Inspections by Authority Having Jurisdiction and Local Utility Company: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation natural gas distribution systems until they

are inspected and approved by Authority Having Jurisdiction and local Utility Company.

2. Notify Plumbing Official Having Jurisdiction and local Utility Company minimum number of days in advance of inspection as required by Authority Having Jurisdiction and local Utility Company to schedule Inspection. Verify with Authority Having Jurisdiction and local Utility Company. a. Underground Inspection: Schedule inspection of natural gas distribution piping





Documents. END OF SECTION

GEOTECHNICAL REPORT FOR



Norman, OK 73072

P 405.329.0423F 405.364.1439

bwaarchitects.com

NEW ELEMENTARY & HIGH SCHOOL 150 SOUTH 1ST STREET MOUNTAIN VIEW, OKLAHOMA Issue Date

08/10/2015 Project Number

N14023